INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(46)

Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber

SEA/EBMP Stangelberger SEA/EBAX/F 1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
SEA/EBMP 1998-05-29 L ASB 150 02
Database reference
1531-BDVBS10101Uen-1-L.emf

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION

EXCHANGE CABINET

BDV BS 101 01

businessphone
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Contents Page Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 INTEGRATED CORDLESS. . . . . . 28

1.1 Supplementary documents. . . . . . . . 4 7.1 Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7.2 Traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 DECLARATION OF 7.3 IC-CU2 (GAP-Protocol) . . . . . . . . . 30
CONFORMITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.4 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_
3 HOW TO OPEN THE CABINET. . . . 7 and KRCNB 301 01/_) . . . . . . . . . . 31
4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 LINE NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 Mounting of the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . 7 8.1 Cables for BDV 113 08 . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 Safety and EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 MARKING OF CABLES . . . . . . . . 44
4.3 Access to the boards . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 10 INTERNAL MDF
(Main Distribution Frame) . . . . . . 44
5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . 9
11 Door Interface Unit
5.1 Replacement of the power
(BFY BS 10101/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
12 INSTALLATION OF ALARM
5.2 Power feeding with an external
INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6 ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6.1 Power supervision of ELU-A. . . . . . 10
6.2 Connection of CM-Boards . . . . . . . 11
6.3 System Power Consumption. . . . . . 11
6.4 BTU-A and BTU-A2 13
6.5 Power failure circuit (PFC) . . . . . . . 13
6.6 BTU-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.7 BTU-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.8 BTU-B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.9 BTU-D and REG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.10 BTU-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.11 CPU-D_ and AUX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.12 CPU-D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.13 ELU-A and ELU-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.14 VMU-HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6.15 VMU-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

1 GENERAL Each branch on the extension line must have:

Exchange cabinet BDV BS 101 01 is designed to be 1 A protective resistor of 10 Ω/1W

furnished with Printed Board Assemblies (hereafter = (REN 195 42/1) connected in series
boards or PBAs) belonging to ERICSSON’s PBX- between cabinet and MDF
system ASB 150 02. System functions, desired by the 2 An overvoltage arrester (gas discharge
customer, are realised with appropriate boards and tube) for quenching surges to protective
system programming. ground should be installed on the network
The PBX is powered by an internally mounted power side of the protective resistor.
supply that is available in two versions. The standard
version is an AC/DC converter and the version with MDF
battery charger offers the same facility but additionally
provides battery back-up or can be supplied from an
external DC-source.
The installed PBX shall be made operational in
accordance with the stipulations that apply for system
ASB 150 02. See document START OF OPERATION
(1537-ASB 150 02).
NOTE: Boards may only be inserted or re- Overvoltage arresters
moved from the cabinet when the power Protective (NGC 402 01)
supply in the cabinet is switched off. resistors 10 Ω/1W Housed in:
overvoltage protection
(REN 195 42/1) Protective cassette (769 027/3)
The new cabinet is adapted for boards with brackets
ground
containing screws to provide a ground connection and
should only be equipped with these boards.These Note: Make sure the MDF is really connected
screws must always be fastened to ensure proper op- to protective ground.
eration. Principal circuit drawing.

Don’t use older board revision states in the new

cabinet. 1.1 Supplementary documents
In principle, a cabinet’s board position can be used for
arbitrary furnishing with boards belonging to PBX • Document collection EN/LZB 103 1233
system ASB 150 02 but the first position is reserved for
• INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
the CPU-D_.
(1531-BML BS 101 01) for the power supply,
Due to the limited load of the cabinet’s power supply equipped with battery charger
units, the definitive board configuration in a cabinet
must follow the prerequisites in section 6.3.
However, it is advisable to protect trunk lines with extra
1.2 Tools
overvoltage protectors especially in geographical
areas highly exposed to lightning. In addition to customary installation tools, the following
are recommended:
Any lines connected to the PBX that are subjected to
excess voltage (transients) in conjunction with e.g. • Use the appropriate connection tool 769 027/2 to
lightning discharges must be equipped with excess connect the cables in the internal MDF.
voltage protection. • Use the appropriate slotting tool LSY 138 252 to
Special considerations must be taken to analogue connect the cables to the external
extension lines that are placed outdoors. In order to MDF SXK 106 4139/1.
prevent the analogue extension boards secondary • Board extractor for PBAs (handle LTD 117 02
protection device from blowing in case of lightning. and bottom LTD 117 12)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

t.
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
th
r
fo
ank
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

t.
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
rth
fo
nk
a
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

3 HOW TO OPEN THE 4 INSTALLATION

CABINET
The PBX can be delivered as a customer configured
Unpack the exchange cabinet. unit or the add-in boards are delivered separately. The
cabinet is always equipped with a power supply,
Using a screw driver lift the blue lid. Unscrew the screw suitable for the local mains. Please check the label
below and remove the cabinets front cover. Check that stating the permitted mains voltage. The cabinet is to
everything has been received according to the delivery be mounted on an indoor wall. A mains outlet must be
note and that nothing has been damaged during the provided near the equipment and shall be easily
transport. accessible. The premises shall comply with the
following prerequisites:
• The air shall be free from dust and smoke
• Environmental conditions according to
businessphone
ETS 300 019 (1-4) (Temperature shall be
between + 5°C and +40°C and relative humidity
may vary between 15% and 80%)
• The PBX shall not be exposed to direct sunlight
• The cable shall preferably run into the PBX from
below the cabinet to ensure sufficient air flow.

4.1 Mounting of the cabinet

1 Use the enclosed drilling plan and drill four 8 mm

2 holes. Mount the cabinet by using the enclosed screws
and plugs. Take into consideration the normal working
height above the floor (about 1.30 m to the lower edge
1 Lift blue lid to access the screw below. of the cabinet) and leave enough room for access on
both sides of the cabinet.
2 Then turn the screw to loosen the cabinet
cover and take off the cabinet cover.
Overall dimensions of the cabinet:
• 485 x 600 x 134 (H x W x D in mm).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

4.2 Safety and EMC

To fulfil electrical safety requirements IEC 950 and Front edge

EN 60950 respectively EN 41003, the exchange must
be connected to protective earth via a flexible wire with
a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm2.

168
Local requirements shall be adhered to.
The connection must be carried out by authorised Label snap-on
personnel. SVB BS 101 02/_ wrist strap
connector
A Note: The mains current rating stated on the label
is the maximum current of the charger version.
B
BATT. Bottom view of cabinet BDV BS 101 01
Shelf All line interfaces in the PBX are protected in
cover SWIVEL- accordance with K.21 (voltage transients up to 1.5 kV).
SHELF
BTU-A, BTU-A2, BTU-B, BTU-C, BTU-D and BTU-E
Turn PSU MDF
out are working with interface TNV.
All other boards and the V.24 port work with interface
SELV.

4.2.1 EMC
A
Connection The ferrites, with the ERICSSON ordering number
Wrist strap STF 82 601, should be situated close to the slot where
for protective connector
earth the cables are led out of the cabinet. Two turns through
(only for
AUSTRIA) the ferrite core are sufficient to comply with EN 55022
cross sectional area >6 mm2 Class B and to avoid disturbances in non-industrial,
residential (home) usage.
Protective earth
4.3 Access to the boards
Before operating, ensure that the chassis is connected
to a hard wired protective earth.
NOTE: Make sure that a sound ground connection to
the exchange has been established. Other-
wise this can be hazardous in case of light-
ning. Use a grounding wrist strap when
handling PBAs sensitive to electrostatic dis-
charges.

Turn out the transport screws (A) about 1 cm at the top

and bottom of the swivel shelf. See figure in section
4.2. Hold the bottom of the shelf, lift the shelf slightly
and turn the swivel shelf counter clockwise (ccw). Turn
the screw (B) two turns at the top of the shelf cover
and remove the cover.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 9(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 5.1 Replacement of the power

supply unit
The power supply units (PSU) for the cabinet are
AC/DC switching power supplies with two input voltage The cabinet is delivered with a PSU already installed.
ranges. Please check if the label states the proper The procedure how to dismount the unit is described
mains voltage as required. For mains supplies with below.
230V to 250V AC, two versions are available:
a Switch off the PSU (A) and unplug the mains
• BML BS 101 02/1 (PSU 230V standard)
from the wall outlet. If the unit is a PSU with
• BML BS 101 01/1 (PSU 230V equipped with battery charger, disconnect the DC supply line to
battery charger). the batteries and plug off the alarm connector on
the unit.
For mains supplies with 115V to 127V AC two versions
are available: b Disconnect the DC supply cord (D) to the swivel
shelf.
• BML BS 101 02/2 (PSU 115V standard)
c Unscrew the transport screw (B) completely and
• BML BS 101 01/2 (PSU 115V equipped with
make 3 turns on screw (C) counter clock wise.
battery charger).
d Push the PSU from the bottom and turn out the
The PSUs deliver 25 W on the PBA supply voltages
PSU clock wise, unhinge and take it out. Then
and 80 W on the 48 V supply voltage. After switching
pull off the mains plug at the bottom of the PSU
on, the power supply has a start-up delay of 8
and disconnect the ground wire.
seconds.
e Install the PSU in the reverse manner.
Warning: The power switch does not disconnect
from mains. The mains cord must be unplugged to When installing a power supply unit with battery
disconnect the mains. charger and battery backup please refer to the
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
The PSU is equipped with a mains fuse rated
(1531-BML BS 101 01).

250VAC 6,3 A T.
NOTE: This fuse NGH 243 01/6300 can be ordered
from Ericsson but is a non-accessible and non-user
serviceable part. Only authorised personnel is (D) (B)
allowed to change the fuse. Contact the local
supplier in this matter.
Battery backup time
Power switch (A) Label
The batteries in the integrated battery pack have a does not
capacity of 2Ah. The power consumption on the 48 V disconnect
should be less than 1.7A. Using fresh batteries a unit from
mains.
backup time of 20 minutes is guaranteed and Standby only
depending on the system configuration longer backup
times could be achieved.

(C)

Ground
Mains power cord plug
IEC 320 C17
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 10(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

5.2 Power feeding with an external DC supply

When the PBX is supplied with power by an external battery with 48V nom. (44 - 56V), the installation of a power
supply equipped with a battery charger (BML BS 101 01/_) is required. The DC supply is connected directly to the
PSU.
An externally accessible fuse 250VAC 6,3 A T is provided on the PSU, but additionally a fuse must be installed in the
supply line with DC current switching capability greater than 160 A.
Note: To prevent arcing never connect the DC source when the PSU has not started-up.
Use the mains to power up or use an external switch to connect the DC source. This is a precaution to minimise the
contact loads on the plug.
For further details see INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML BS 101 01).
Battery operation often requires different preconditions consequently, only an overview can be provided with regard
to battery capacity/charging capacity. The batteries should be supplied locally. The type is described in detail in
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML BS 101 01).

6 ALLOCATION
In principle, all board positions in cabinet BDV BS 101 01 can be used for arbitrary configurations with PBAs
belonging to PBX-system ASB 150 02.
The boards are equipped with ground brackets on the top and bottom. When installing make sure to fasten the
boards with the supplied screws.
There are recommendations for configurations in order to simplify operation and maintenance. For further information
see document collection EN/LZB 103 1233.
Sub-equipped boards:
Install sub-equipped boards in the last position after the standard boards to enable easy upgrading without having to
re-number trunks and extensions.

6.1 Power supervision of ELU-A

The board is equipped with an automatic traffic limiter restricting the internal power dissipation on the board to a
maximum of 12W. This depends on both the line length and the number of lines busy.
When the power consumption exceeds the limit, no more lines have access for use and at least two lines have to go
on hook for all lines to work normally again.
When connecting external voice systems a maximum of 8 lines are recommended on each board. The remaining
lines on the board are to be connected to low-traffic extensions.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 11(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.2 Connection of CM-Boards

Connect the correct type of call metering board, according to the figure below, on BTU-A board ROF 157 5110/_ or
ROF 157 5127/_ and in the same fashion on the BTU-C board ROF 157 5111/_. The BTU-C cannot be equipped
with a CM50 board as the flat ribbon cable cannot be connected and CM12/16 (ROA 219 5135/1).

Line 0 - 1

CM-
board

Line 2 - 3

Note: When installing a CM50-board connect the

cable before mounting the CM50-board. The
BTU-A board must also be connected to
Line 4 - 5 earth.

The following boards are available CM50 ROA 219 5064/1, with flat ribbon cable and CM12/16 ROA 219 5135/1 or
ROA 219 5062/1 without cable.

6.3 System Power Consumption

The power demand of the system comprises the sum of the current demands of all extensions, base stations etc.
This total current has to be delivered by the power supply. Choose the one delivering the rated current with a suitable
margin for add on equipment depending on the installation site.
Base Station Power Demand
To minimise the power dissipation on the serial communication wires EPP should be used extensively. Up to 60 BS
can be installed in a cabinet. Short power peaks can be covered by installing a battery cabinet.
The total current for all BS must be less than the power supply(s) capacity. The total 48 VDC load on the power sup-
ply has to be calculated as follows:
Cable STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP This table states the current demand in mA for a Base Sta-
length 0,5 mm ∅ 0,6 mm ∅ 0,5 mm ∅ 0,6 mm ∅ tion depending on the cable length and cable diameter.
0m 104 104 104 104 77 104 104 104
100m 110 106 108 106 83 106 108 106
Calculation example:
200m 114 110 110 108 87 110 110 108 Line length to Base Station: 200m
300m 121 112 114 109 94 112 114 109 Resistance of loop: 0.18 Ω/m
400m 129 115 118 110 103 115 118 110 Cable diameter (φ): 0,6 mm
500m 119 112 119 112
600m
Assuming 4 Base Stations are already
121 114 121 114
700m 125 117 125 117
connected they consume a current of: 440 mA
800m 129 118 129 118
Power demand taken from Power Calcu-
900m 133 121 133 121 lations below, for telephones: 984 mA
1,0km 139 123 139 123
Total load on power supply: 1424 mA
1,1km 146 125 146 125
1,2km 152 127 152 127 This total load for the exchange can be
1,3km 160 129 160 129 supplied by the power supply as it is less
1,4km 171 131 171 131 than 1.7A.
1,5km 183 135 183 135
1,6km 204 137 204 137
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 12(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Extension Power Demand

TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION

Typ (mA) Max (mA) Typ (mA) Max (mA)
BASIC DBC 210 14 35 OPERATOR DBC 214 40 120
DBC 199 25 35 DBC 663 67 110
CONSOLE DBC 754 75
ECONOMY DBC 601 27 32
DBC 751 38 DBC 214 with 2 DBY 409 01 35 70
ECONOMYplus DBC 211 14 35 DBC 214 with 4 DBY 409 02*) 35 70
DBC 201 30 50
DBC 212 14 35 ANALOGUE 40
STANDARD (in active state)
DBC 202 30 50
DBC 631 65 70 TAU 2610 4 4
DBC 755 50 73
DBC 752 Desktop Adapter 23
50 73
DBC 213 35 70 BTU-B (S-interface
EXECUTIVE 35 70 per physical link) 50
DBC 203
DBC 662 70 73 BTU-C
DBC 753 75 index (/1,/2) 1) (per trunk) 14 35
DBC 213 with 2 DBY 409 01 42 70
35 70 50
Radio base station: refer to table above
DBC 213 with 4 DBY 409 02*)
1
) provides current on trunk lines in active state to public exchange.
The maximum values for telephones result when all LEDs are lit and if available, loudspeaking is on at max. volume.
*) with connected external power supply.
Power calculation example

LINE CURRENT
QUANTITY Calculation example:
EQUIPMENT (mA)
DBC 210 3 54 3 x DBC 210
selected 5 x DBC 201
DBC 201 5 150 line equipment 13 x DBC 202
10 x DBC 203
DBC 202 13 390 1 x DBC 663
Total: 32 system telephones
DBC 203 10 350
DBC 214 1 40
TOTAL 32 984

The calculation above shows how to calculate the current demand for a given installation. This amount of current has
to be supplied by the installed power supply.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 13(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.4 BTU-A (ROF 157 5110/-) and 6.5 Power failure circuit (PFC)
BTU-A2 (ROF 157 5120/_)
In the event of mains failure and if no battery back up
On delivery from the factory both contacts are in the OFF is available for the PBX, there are normally 2 lines on
position, and the line is a normal trunk. the BTU-A and BTU-C (see under BTU-C on next
page) board which automatically switch the trunk lines
When both contacts on a DIP-switch are set to position to analogue telephones connected to this board.
ON, the line is to be regarded as a music source input.
On power failure, these telephones will automatically
Different contact positions are not allowed. be connected to the public exchange.
Note: Only lines 4 - 7 can be used as a music source It is also possible to use the power failure telephones
input. Not available on BTU-A subequipped ROF during normal operation, if an ELU-A board is in-
157 5127/_. stalled.
.
BTU-A & BTU-C1
The DIP-switch is shown
with both contacts in 85
OFF position PFb BTC b ELUA
ON a

Line 4 PFa

1 2 Power failure set

Line 5
La
86 Trunk
Line 6 Lb Indicator

87
Line 7 Relay shown in power fail position
88

Connection field 6
A C
LA0
18 LA1
LB0
20 LB1
LA2
22 LA3
LB2
24 LB3 Line wires for
26 LA5 connection to
LA4 Public Exchange
LB4 28 LB5
*)
LA6
30 LA7

LB6
32 LB7

*) Not available on sub-equipped board see below

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 14(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Connection field 4 6.6 BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/-)

Not always mounted
(market-dependent) Connection of Connection field 4 and 6
A C analogue telephone
PFa0 18 a0 RED
Connection to YELLOW
4 PFb0 20 b0 ELU-A board GREEN The index number
refers to the individual
on the board
PFa1 22 a1

PFb1 24 b1 power failure (field 4)

A C
PFa0 a0
18 On the BTU-A2 the PFb0 b0
bottom half of this
20 connector is used
to connect to PTT
22 signalling ground
trunk lines (field 6)
24
A C
Connection La_0 La_1
to analogue Connection to Lb_0 Lb_1
telephone(s) ELU-A board La_2 La_3
A C
Lb_2 Lb_3
PFa2 26 a0 Only mounted if the BTU-A
La_4 La_5
has 4 PFC circuits (market Lb_4 Lb_5
PFb2 28 b0 dependent). La_7
La_6
Lb_6 Lb_7
PFa3 30 a1 This connector is used
for PFC circuits on the
PFb3 32 b1 BTU-A2
Earth connection on BTU-A2 (Austria only)
Some markets require an earth connection of the in-
The BTU-C (ROF 1575 111/1) features eight incoming
coming PTT earth (functional earth) to the exchange.
trunk lines with DID. The first four individuals can also
This is provided on the connector installed above the
be used for outgoing traffic.
PFC circuit connector on pins A22, A24, C22 and C24.
Use an extra Krone bar to connect the PTT earth wires
to the wires going to the board connector. BTU-A & BTU-C1

PFb BTC b ELUA

a

PFa

Power failure set

La
Trunk
Lb Indicator

Relay shown in power fail position

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 15(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.7 BTU-B (ROF 157 5121/_) 6.8 BTU-B2 (ROF 157 5121/_)

Applies for indices 1 and 3 Applies for indices 4 and 5

The BTU-B provides connection for up to 8 physical
links and every physical link can be configured as a S-
or T-interface. On the S-interface every link provides
remote power feeding with 40V/50 mA = 2W and con-
nection for up to 8 terminals.
418

B
A

C
ON

418 410 411

412 413

414 415

416 417
ON

ON

410 411 A Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

ON

ON

412 413 B Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 4

414 415 DIP-switches position 410-417

ON

ON

416 417 These switches control S- and T-interface termination

and S-interface power feeding on the link 0...7.
ON

ON

On factory delivery all

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 1 switches are set to OFF
Connects power feeding ground
4

B Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 2

Connects -40V for power feeding
3

C Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

Connects 100 Ω receive side termination
2

D Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/4

Connects 100 Ω send side termination
ON

1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 16(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Note: at the end of each line a termination resistor (refer to documentation of the TE) is also equipped
must be installed (e.g. in the last wall outlet). with a SBCX or equivalent.
The switch 1 selects the termination on the transmitter
interface and switch 2 selects the termination on the 1 km (standard range)
TE SBCX
receiver interface. Switches 3 and 4 enable remote and up to 2 km with
power feeding to ISDN terminals connected to a link. TEs equipped with SBCX

When connected as S-interface switches 1...4 should TE TE TE

be set to ON. up to 500 m (standard range)
SBCX
and up to 1.5 km with
TE TE TE
Settings of the S-interface relevant on TEs equipped with SBCX
BTU-B
board indices -3,-4,-5 Ranges on the extended passive bus

DIP-switch position 418 Short passive bus

d1
When selecting which link is to be configured
as a S-/Q-/T-interfaces start with switch:
d4
with TR BTU-B
Line pairs: in outlet
d3
Q/T-interface 0+1
4

TE TE TE

2+3 d4 - up to 1m
3

OFF... Q/T-Interface d1 - 150m to 250m (standard range)

ON ...S-Interface d3 - line to terminal up to 10m
4+5
2

Extended passive bus

ON

6+7
1

S-interface d1
d2
On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF
d4
with TR BTU-B
in outlet d3
Note: When selecting S- or T-interfaces start by
TE
setting the T-interfaces using switches 4, 3, 2 TE TE
and 1 in consecutive order then set the S- d1 - up to 500m (standard range), d2 - between terminals
1,5 km on 30 nF cables with 25 to 50 meters
interfaces starting with switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. TEs equipped with SBCX
d3 - line to terminal up to 10m d4 - up to 1m
Settings of the S-interface
Abbreviations:
Choose with RASC the configuration of the interface:
TE Terminal Equipment
Extended passive bus default setting TR Termination Resistor (installed at the end of the
and Short passive bus. interface line. Use outlets with resistor mounted)
Ranges on the interface Outlet according to IEC 603-7 with termination

The BTU-B is equipped with the S/T Bus Interface Cir- Outlet according to IEC 603-7 without termina-
cuit eXtended (SBCX). This circuit offers the advan- tion
tage of covering a higher attenuation on cables.
The standard S/T-interface specification considers ca-
bles with 6,5 dB attenuation equivalent to about 1000m
cable length in single terminal configuration.
Using the S/T Bus Interface Circuit eXtended (SBCX)
up to13 dB line attenuation can be covered. The figure
below shows the ranges using standard 0.6 mm diam-
eter twisted pair unshielded cables with a capacitive
load of max. 30nF per km and the terminal equipment
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 17(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.9 BTU-D (ROF 157 5112/1) and

Connection field 6 REG (ROF 157 5112/2)
A C
T0A
02 R0A
T0B
04 R0B A
T1A
06 R1A
T1B The DIP-switch is
08 R1B shown with
T2A B
10 R2A both contacts in
T2B OFF position
12 R2B
T3A ON
14 R3A
197
T3B S/T-Interface for
16 R3B 200
T4A connecting trunks
18 R4A 1 2
and S-terminals
T4B
20 R4B
T5A
22 R5A
T5B
24 R5B
T6A 26 R6A

T6B 28 R6B

T7A 30 R7A

T7B 32 R7B

199
Wall outlet connection

EIA/TIA 568 Wiring Schemes

198
4 5
Pin desig- NT function: TE function:
6 3 nation (polarity of remote (polarity of remote
power feeding) power feeding)
8 1
5 Transmit (-) Receive (-)
7 2 4 Transmit (-) Receive (-)

3 Receive (+) Transmit (+)

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/1
6 Receive (+) Transmit (+)
Wiring side of 8-pole
wall outlet e.g. B Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/2
1 Power sink 3 (+) Power source 3(+)
KRONE RJ-K LN Power source 3(-)
2
optional

Power sink 3 (-)

7 Power source 2(-) Power sink 2(-)

8 Power source 2(+) Power sink 2(+)
6.9.1 DIP-switches in position 197 and 200
S-interface in T-interface on
socket plug
1 Depending on the firmware used, this board enables
either ISDN or CAS function. The PROM set is availa-
ble for CAS (LZY203 2212/1) or ISDN PRA
(LZY203 2213/1). DIP-switch pos. 197 on BTU-D se-
lects the register function of the board. The switch 200
is reserved for future use.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 18(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

For ranges exceeding 6 dB attenuation additional digit-

197/1 197/2 FUNCTION al data transmission equipment is required. Line Ter-
OFF OFF digital trunk MFC only minating Unit (LTU) ASB 501 04 is available for such
ON digital trunk MFE BTU-D purposes.
ON OFF Register MFC BTU-D Connection field 6
ON Register MFE or
REG. A C
18 RING_OUT
19 TIP_OUT
20
Connection for 75 Ω
6.9.2 DIP-switches in positions 198 and 199 22 RING_IN coaxial cable
23 TIP_IN
24
Selection of ground strapping for the coax 75 Ω or se- 26 LA1
lection of the 120 Ω twisted pair interface. Outgoing
28 LB1 wires Connection for
120 Ω twisted pairs
198/1 198/2 FUNCTION 30 LA2 Incoming
199/1 199/2 32 wires
LB2
OFF OFF 120 Ω connection1) 0V
OFF ON screen connected to ground There are specific requirements for the digital interface
ON OFF screen connected to ground wiring to meet the demands of EMC.
via 1nF capacitor If a twisted pair connection should be installed and the
requirements of EN 55022, class B have to be fulfilled,
1) Factory setting a ferrite is available with the ERICSSON ordering
number STF 82 601. Taking the cable and making
On factory delivery the switches are set to OFF-posi- three turns around the ferrite core meets the demand
tion = no ground thus enabling 120 Ω interface with a of sufficient noise reduction. The ferrite should be
twisted pair cable. These DIP-switches connect the situated close to the slot where the cables are led out
75 Ω interface coax screen to ground, either directly to of the cabinet. In most cases this cable is supplied by
0V or via a 1 nF capacitor. DIP-switch 198 switches the the PTT and should not be fed via the MDF.
receiver and 199 the transmitter side. The screen shall
normally be grounded on the transmitter side. Normal- Some markets (e.g. Austrian PTT) require the use of a
ly, the screen on the reception side is not connected to double-shielded interface cable. The outer shield
ground. Refer to local market requirements should be connected to frame earth and the inner
shield should be connected to 0V on the board. A 20 m
Ranges on the interface of the BTU-D long standard cable is available with the ERICSSON
This interface covers the short distance to the next NT ordering number TSR 901 0481/20000.
or Line Terminating Unit as the end point of a public or
private network. The range is only defined in terms of
the covered attenuation by the interface that is 6 dB. If
required choose cables with low attenuation to achieve
a maximum distance.

Coax 75 Ω and twisted pair 120 Ω interface

d1

Line terminating unit BTU-D

d1 - The line length depends on cable type used. The board

allows 6 dB cable attenuation at 1.024 MHz. Check cable
attenuation at 1,024 MHz per 100m.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 19(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.10 BTU-E (ROF 157 5113/_)

SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS M-WIRE CONNECTION SETTINGS

2-wire connection 4-wire connection APPLICATION SPEECH M-WIRES
106...406 108/308 106...406 108/308
on on on on PAGING S6..off
2-wireS7..off
S8..off
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 AMERICAN S6, S7 and S8
4-wire
E&M see local
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SIGNALLING requirements
DOUBLE 4-wire S6..on
INDIVIDUAL 0 INDIVIDUAL 1 M-WIRE S7..on
SIGNALLING S8..off
uses switches 106 and 108/1 uses switches 206 and 108/2
CAILHO E&M S6..off
INDIVIDUAL 2 INDIVIDUAL 3 4-wire S7..off
SIGNALLING
S8..off
uses switches 306 and 308/1 uses switches 406 and 308/2
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 S6..off
SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS 4-wire S7..off
Only on /2 boards S8..off
Switches select between 2- or 4-wire speech
connection. Two individuals share switches 108 S6 connects -48V to M1 terminal via 6.2 Kohm
and 308 S7 connects 0V to M0 wire locally.
On boards with Rev. R2A these switches are re- S8 connects 0V to M20-wire.
placed by relays. These relays are set automat-
ically by programming the filter coefficients.

Connection field 4 and 6 at front of BTU-E_

Speech (field 4) RED
YELLOW
A C GREEN
LA_0 18 LC_0 YELLOW
LB_0 20 LD_0 GREEN
308
LA_1 22 LC_1
108
LA & LB - 2-wire send/re-
LB_1 24 LD_1 ceive or 4-wire send.
LA_2 26 LC_2 LC & LD - 4-wire receive.
LB_2 28 LD_2
LA_3 30 LC_3

0
LB_3
32
LD_3 106

INDIVIDUALS
Signalling (field 6)
206

1
A C
M2_0 E2_0
M20_0 E20_0 306 2
M2_1 E2_1
M20_1 E20_1
406
3

1 M2_2 E2_2
M20_2 E20_2
M2_3 E2_3 109
S6 S7 S8
3

M20_3 E20_3
INDIVIDUALS

M1_0 E1_0
209
1 2

M0_0 E0_0
1

M1_1 E1_1
on

309
2

M0_1 E0_1
1 M1_2 E1_2
3

M0_2 E0_2 409

M1_3 E1_3
M0_3 E0_3

1 M20_ and M0_ can be switched by S7 and S8 to 0V on M-WIRE SETTINGS

the BTU-E_ locally.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 20(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.10.1 Paging connection

The figure shows how to connect the paging equipment Ericall Contactor with 2 wire speech. The PBX sends paging
information to paging system (pin 6A18) using M1 contact, and information about ’paging in progress’ or ’paging
equipment not present’ is received on the E1-wire (pin 6C18) from the paging equipment.

Switch settings
on This switch setting is used for
signalling on E1 and M1.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX Paging equipment

Z
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

S5 4A20 LB

0V

S7 M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V

Figure showing Paging equipment and 2-wire speech with ’loop connection’ of the E&M-wires.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 21(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.10.2 Four wire speech connection

The four wire speech and signalling connection has the benefit of not needing additional signalling wires. There are
two different types of signalling supported:
Cailho E&M-signalling (balanced battery). The two way signalling utilises common mode DC pulses via the centre
tap of the transformer. On one side a detector is connected between the -48 VDC and the centre tap of the
transformer. The other end uses opto relay M4 to switch the line to 0V (Ground). The detector reads the current flow
to ground every time M4 closes.
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 with 2280 Hz tones. In this case no DC signalling is used but instead signalling is performed by
switching on and off a 2280 Hz tone, which is detected by a tone receiver on the other side. This is only available on
index 2 boards.

Switch settings
on This switch setting inhibits signalling on E1 and M1. Only AC or DC
signalling on the four wire speech connection is used.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

2280 Hz PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
M4
0V
Detector
autom. 2/4wire

-48V
DSLAC

1uF 560 Ω 4A20 LB

0V
2280 Hz 4C18 LC
detector

Detector -48V 0V

4C20 LD
0V

Figure showing Cailho E&M signalling and CEPT L1 or SSAC 15 with tone signalling
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 22(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.10.3 E&M-signalling

Signalling on E & M wires is done either using one or two E&M pairs depending on what is required. Using just E1
and M1 is a very common practice. One case to mention is the American E&M signalling where the M1 wire toggles
between -48VDC and 0V.
Double E&M signalling requires the E1/M1 wires for the signalling of information and the E2/M2 wires indicate
blocking of the connection. The E1/M1-wires are used for signalling and E2/M2-wires are used for blocking. The
figure shows 0V connection to the M-wires in both ends.

Switch settings
Standard E & M signalling Double E & M signalling
on This switch setting is used on This is the switch setting when
for signalling on E1 and M1. E1, E2, M1 and M2 are used for
signalling.
1 2 3 1 2 3
S6 S7 S8 S6 S7 S8

Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

4A20 LB
0V
4C18 LC

S8** 4C20 LD
0V
M3**
-48V **application specific
toggles between 0 and -48VDC
S7 (e.g. American signalling)
M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

-48V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V
S6 M2
0V 6A02 M2 E2 Detector -48V

6A04 M20 E20 0V

6C02 E2 M2
-48V Detector 0V

0V 6C04 E20 M20

Figure showing four wire speech and standard (double) E&M signalling.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 23(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.11 CPU-D_ (ROF 157 5118/_) and Connections on the CPU-D_

AUX_(ROF1575 119/_) For connection of TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT, see
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-RPM 603 339).
Before installing the board mount the system software
PROMs in the appropriate positions.

A C
Audio 18

ROF1575118
BS2 9727
CPU-D
R1A
Factory test
Audio 20
-48 VDC
red ALARM 22
yellow (out) ALARM Polarity
independent
green 0V 24 ALARM input
External 26
sensor 1 External
sensor 3
0V 28
0V
External
sensor 2 30
Not used
0V 32
Not used

TXD 10 RTS
only this V.24
0V 12 DTR port is active
RXD on the AUX3
14 DCD
board
DSR 16 CTS
red TXD 18 RTS
Cold 0V
start 20 DTR
strap RXD 22 DCD

DSR 24 CTS
TXD 26 RTS
0V 28 DTR

RXD 30 DCD

DSR 32 CTS

The ALARM input is optically isolated and the voltage

has to be between 20 - 60 VDC.
The ALARM output is equipped with an open collector
transistor with a capacity of 20 mA at 12 VDC
(Maximum 14 VDC).
A B Use the following prefabricated cables to connect the
A Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x9/ xx peripheral data equipment to CPU-D_ and AUX_:
B Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x8/ xx • PC is TSR 902 0448/1
• printer is TSR 902 0476/1
r additional CIL storage capacity up to two additional
battery backup RAMs can be added. • modem is TSR 902 0466/1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 24(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.12 CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) Connections on the CPU-D4

Similar to the previous versions this board provides the
V.24 interfaces but additionally the RS-485 interface for
longer ranges. With the software key (FECU)
KDU BS 130 06/_ new functionalities can be ac-

RYS 102 533/1

RYS 102 533/2
cessed.
FW PROMS

red
yellow
green

alarm relay
B18
B22
B20
ABC

Audio 18

ROF1575130
BS2 9727
CPU
R1A
Factory test
Audio 20
-48 VDC
red ALARM 22
yellow (out) ALARM (in)
green 0V 24 0V
RTC

External 26
Temp1 External
FECU Temp3
connector 0V 28
0V
External
Temp2 30
Not used
0V 32
2nd Battery RAM

3rd Battery RAM

1st Battery RAM

Not used

TXD 10 RTS
0V 12 DTR

RXD 14 DCD
Battery RAM CBA DSR 16 CTS
KDY BS 101 02/1 SW PROMS red TXD + 18 RTS
Transmit
A Insert PROM "RYS 102 xx1/ x" Coldstart 0V - 20 DTR RS 485

loop
strap
B Insert PROM "RYS 102 xx2/ x" RXD + 22 DCD
Receive
C Insert PROM "RYS 102 xx3/ x" DSR - RS 485
24 CTS
TXD 26 RTS
To put the board in operation mount the system soft-
ware PROMs in the appropriate positions. The number 0V 28 DTR
of battery RAMs mounted on the CPU-D4 board is RXD 30 DCD
functionality dependent.
DSR 32 CTS

To connect the RS-485 data interface use plug

RNV 321 01 02 be sure to loop RTS with CTS other-
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 25(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

wise data is lost if printer is OFF. The range of the in-

terface is up to 1200m.
Several converters may be used but with the following
successful tests were accomplished:
IC-485SI from ARP DATACON and
232<->485/422 Converter Plus IC-109AE from Black
Box Corp.

6.12.1 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU)

Connecting this plug activates the appropriate applica-

tions and features as ordered depending on the FECU
index number. If no plug is connected only a limited
Version 3.0 system functionality is available. The indi-
ces 2 to 10 always include the Basic Version 3 func-
tionality (index 1).
For detailed information of the features enabled by the
different FECUs refer to 15534-ASB 150 02 Uen
FACILITY DESCRIPTION GENERAL.

FECU number Functionality Version 3.1

KDU BS 130 06/1 Basic Version 3.0 functionality
KDU BS 130 06/2 + std. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 06/3 + std. digital networking
KDU BS 130 06/4 + full. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 06/5 + full. digital networking
KDU BS 130 06/6 + CTI
KDU BS 130 06/7 + CTI and std. digital networking
for max. 32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 06/8 + CTI and std. digital networking
KDU BS 130 06/9 + CTI + full. digital networking for
max. 32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 06/10 + CTI + full. digital networking for
unlimited number of interfaces
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 26(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.13 ELU-A and ELU-D

Connection field 6 at front of ELU-D(3) and ELU-A
The relevant boards are:
• ELU-D (ROF 1575 116/_)
• ELU-A (ROF 1575 114/1) LA0 A C
(LA16)
02 LA1 (LA17)
• ELU-A2 (ROF 1575 114/2) (LB16) LB0
04 LB1 (LB17)
• ELU-D3 (ROF 157 5130/_) (LA18) LA2
06 LA3 (LA19)
(LB18) LB2
08 LB3 (LB19)
10 LA3 (LA21)
RYS 102 532/2

RYS 102 532/1

(LA20) LA4
12 LB5 (LB21)
(LB20) LB4
(LA22) LA6 14 LA7 (LA23)
4

(LB22) LB6 Extension Line

This switch is mount- 16 LB7 (LB23)
connector to
3

ed for future use 18 LA9 (LA25) terminal

(LA24) LA8
LB9 (LB25) equipment
20
2

(LB24) LB8
LA11 (LA27)
ON

(LA26) LA10
22
1

(LB26) LB10 LB11 (LB27)

24
(LA28) LA12
26 LA13 (LA29)

28 LB13 (LB29)
(LB28) LB12
30 LA15 (LA31)
(LA30) LA14
(LB30) LB14
32 LB15 (LB31)

The connections in field 4 are in brackets (only on

ELU-D3 for individuals 16 to 31)

On the first ELU-D_ board in the system the first three

extension positions should be used to connect the
OPERATOR telephones.
On sub-equipped ELU-A and ELU-D_ boards the con-
nection for extensions 8...15 (32) are not mounted.

View of the ELU-D3 board

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 27(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

6.14 VMU-HD (ROF 157 5126/1)

990/1 990/2 FUNCTION
To install unpack the VMU-HD board with the mounted ON or
OFF 16 channels, no register function
hard disk. The Flash disks are available with a capacity OFF
of 60 MB. Remove the transport protection for the hard OFF 8 channels with MFC detection
ON and DTMF / Tone receiver
disk and keep it in case of re-shipment e.g. factory re-
8 channels with MFE detection
pair. Install and configure the VMU-HD in the cabinet ON and DTMF / Tone receiver
according to the stipulations in 1537-ASB15002Uen
START OF OPERATION. Structure of directories on hard disk or Flash card
Note: The VMU-HD will not start up without internal \Info0 \message2 \anno0
directories created on the hard disk. \Info1 \message3 \anno1
\message4 \anno2
The DIP-switch is shown with \message5 \anno3
both contacts in OFF position
(factory setting)
\annoF
ON
Removal of hard disk or Flash card
To remove the hard disk take out the board from the
1 2
system. Disengage the hard disk with lever A and pull
out the hard disk.

990 6.15 VMU-D (ROF 157 5117/1)

The VMU-D has no switches, but is equipped with a

back up battery, RNV 991 942/001 to prevent loss of
data in case of power failure. Install the battery to con-
nection field 4. before the exchange is started. For safe
operation, replace this battery periodically every five
years in accordance with document MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION (1541-ASB 150 02 Uen).

Installation of battery back-up on VMU-D

PCMCIA Hard/
Flash disk
type III and II

A
Pressbutton
Press button to disengage
to disengage the
the hard diskhard
and
A take it out.
disk and take it out.
DIP switch on VMU-HD
DIP switch 990 selects whether register function is en-
abled or not.
Connection
Limitations: field 4
Battery RNV 991 942/001
Only one VMU-HD can be mounted per cabinet and
just one type either VMU-HD or VMU-D can be in-
stalled in a system.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 28(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7 INTEGRATED CORDLESS plug is available for various numbers of cordless tele-

phones. For up to 8 portables no plug is required.
The Integrated Cordless (IC) is a digital cordless tele-
phone solution complying to the DECT standard pro-
viding wireless connection for up to 108 portables with FECU number Number of Portables
the A-protocol and 210 portables in GAP-protocol ap-
plications. Several components comprise a complete KDU 130 05/1 16
system. KDU 130 05/2 24
After the system has been physically installed use KDU 130 05/3 32
RASC and the Cordless System Manager (CSM) for
initialization, maintenance, updating, fault finding and KDU 130 05/4 48
when possible to recover the PBX from errors. The KDU 130 05/5 64
CSM is orderable under LZYNB 201 01 R6A or higher
for the A-protocol and LZYNB 201 05 R1B or higher for KDU 130 05/6 108
GAP applications. KDU 130 05/7 210 (only with IC-CU2)

7.1 Board Descriptions

7.2 Traffic capacity

7.1.1 IC-Control Unit2 (IC-CU2) The traffic capacity of the Cordless part of the PBX is
mainly determined by the IC-CU_ and in exceptional
The IC-CU2 is the control board supporting the DECT cases also by the Base Stations. The IC-CU can han-
GAP-protocol. The IC-CU2 includes 8 voice channel dle a maximum of 56 simultaneous calls and the IC-
units and is equipped with 4 BSs interfaces. CU2 can handle up to 60 simultaneous calls. Each
Base Station has a capacity of 8 simultaneous calls.
The wiring distance with remote power feeding to the
BSs using only the serial communication wires SC0 The traffic capacity of the IC-CU_ is determined by:
and SC1 is limited to 400m. For line lengths up to • the Grade Of Service (GOS) required by the
900m additional Express Power feeding Pairs (EPP) customer
need to be wired. The maximum wire length between
BS (fed locally) and IC-CU2 is only data limited and • the number of speech circuits available, with a
may reach up to 900 meters. limit of 64.

The board offers the following connections: The Grade Of Service is the probability that a call is re-
jected because of system congestion. The customer
• the Cordless System Manager (on a PC) has to indicate which Grade Of Service is acceptable.
• a printer to log errors A Grade Of Service of 1%, or 0.01, means an average
of 1 lost call in every 100 calls. The IC-CU2 is
• 4 Base Stations equipped with a SPU providing 8 speech circuits.
• the Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU). The two parameters mentioned above (GOS and the 8
speech circuits) and the total amount of traffic (Erlang)
that is required, are related to each other. The table
7.1.2 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU) below shows the capacity at a required GOS.

This plug determines which maximum number of port-

ables are allowed to be connected to the system. This
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 29(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Practically, this table is used to calculate from a given GOS and Erlang value the number of portable users.
IC-CU2 Speech Grade of service (GOS)
circuits 2% 1% 0.5% 0.1%
1 8 3.6 3.2 2.7 2.1

For the calculation it is necessary to estimate the time the portables actually make calls. The table below shows the
Erlang value depending on the estimated mean call-minutes for a portable telephone. These values may be different
between departments depending on their activities. These values multiplied by the number of portables result in a
traffic capacity that has to be provided.

Minutes mErlang Minutes mErlang

per hour per hour
3 50 15 250
6 100 18 300
9 150 30 500
12 200 45 750

Example:
A customer ordering a system with 24 portable telephones. He estimates that each portable generates 200 mE
each in average. These values require a system with a traffic capacity of 3,6 E (0,15x24). With an accepted GOS of
2.0% the traffic capacity can be met.

7.2.1 Traffic Capacity of Base Stations

A Base Station, having 8 channels available, has an Erlang value of 2.7 with a GOS of 0.5%. This means that each
Base Station can serve 18 portables, assuming each portable generates 150 mE during busy hour or 13.5 portables
generating 200 mE each.
Example:
Assuming a full coverage in a building can be achieved with 2 Base Stations means that 20 portables generate
together 20 x 0.150 = 3 E. Every Base Station has a traffic capacity of 2.7 Erlang. To have a sufficient
coverage two Base Stations covering the area of the busiest part of the company are needed.
Practically, the total capacity offered by the cordless network is generally more than sufficient, but this is from an av-
erage point of view. In certain places, traffic demands may vary such that locally the network is often blocked, or has
a lower GOS than required. For instance a purchase department may easily generate 300 mE per Portable during
busy hour, thus, when e.g. with 6 persons giving a very high load on the Base Station close by. It may be necessary
to add a Base Station in this area to have enough capacity for others to call as well. Also think of e.g. canteens during
lunch time etc.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 30(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7.3 IC-CU2 (ROF 157 5131/_) (GAP-Protocol)

LEDs

RP error red Switch 1 and 2 must have the ON

Individual blocked yellow same position. ON (default)
Individual busy green 48V from the backplane. OFF
CPU error/DCT error log green activates external DC input and
SPU error red 1 2
disconnects the backplane.
CLU error red
DECT Sync port
RYS 102 531/1
SYNCH A IN
RYS 102 531/2
ON

SYNCH B IN

synchronization
DECT
SYNCH A OUT 0V

ROF1575131/1
BS2 9727
IC-CU2
R1A
SYNCH B OUT 0V

RYS 102 554/1

(KDU 130 05/__)
V0(-)
External power input
via front connector (to enable V1(+)
set switch 1and 2 to OFF) RYSNB 101 20

to power supply BML 351 048 TSR BS 101 12/1500

Express Power feeding to base stations

A C RYSNB 101 19

+
To BS 4 EPP(-) 18 EPP(+)
20
22
To BS 3 EPP(-) EPP(+) RYS 102 553/1

24
To BS 2 EPP(-) 26 EPP(+) RYSNB 101 23/2 remove paper
insulation
28
30 Maintenance port
To BS 1 EPP(-) EPP(+)
TXM 18 RTS
32
0V 20 DTR
Serial communication to base stations PRINTER
A C RCV 22 DCD PORT
02
To BS 4 SC0 SC1 n.c. 24 CTS
04 TXM 26 RTS
06 0V
To BS 3 SC0 SC1 28 DTR
08 MAINTENANCE
RCV 30 DCD PORT
10
To BS 2 SC0 SC1 DSR
12 32 CTS

14
To BS 1 SC0 SC1
16
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 31(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7.4 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_ and KRCNB 301 01/_)

The Base Station (BS) enables radio communication between the Integrated Cordless system and the portable
telephones. The communication via two 2B+D interfaces, requires two twisted pair cables. Both interfaces provide in
total eight 32 kbit/s speech paths between a BS and IC-CU2, enabling a BS to handle eight simultaneous calls. The
BS is connected to the IC-CU2 via two wire pairs called serial communication wires (SC0 & SC1) carrying up to 8
simultaneous digital voice connections and the central power feeding. Apart from data communication these two twisted
pairs are also be used to distribute power to the BSs. Two additional pairs can be wired to provide a greater powering
range. There are three methods to power BSs:
1. centrally via backplane (with or without EPP)
2. centrally via external input (with / w.o EPP)
3. via local power supply (optional).
With the first and second methods power is distributed via the IC-CU2 to the BS. The cable length between BS and
IC-CU2 depends on the number wires used for power feeding, the type of cable and environmental noise. In the third
case (local feeding), BSs are powered by an AC-adapter or another power source which is not routed via the cabinet.
The number of BSs used in a system depends on the area to be covered and the traffic density. Typical in-house
coverage is up to 30 meter radius. In practice the cell size may vary between 10 meters indoors in worst case situations,
up to 300 meters outdoor in free space.
The BS has two main functions:
• to modulate a carrier with the digital encoded information (TDMA frame directed to portable)
• to demodulate a modulated carrier (TDMA frame received from portable).
A special cover (KRY NB 101 01) is available to mount the BS (KRCNB 201 03) outdoors providing splash proof
housing and water tight sealings for the wiring.

7.4.1 Base Station Planning

The major task when providing a wireless service is to estimate the number of BSs and to find their most suitable
location. A number of factors tend to limit the range of a BS like the materials the wall is composed of or the location
and size of machines, furniture, air-conditioning systems, elevators etc. This results in unexpected reflections or
absorption of radio waves. Generally BSs should not be located on outer walls, except if the outdoor area has to be
covered as well, as this reduces the area actually covered. All of these unpredictable influencing factors makes it
extremely difficult to define rules for how to cover an area with a suitable number of BSs. In difficult environments the
use of a site survey tool (LTT NB 101 01/_) is recommended.
Establish a Base Station plan for the installation site to determine the best location for the BSs.
Base Station aerial range
• In an office environment in a steel concrete building up to 30 m in diameter can be covered and including,
under normal conditions, the neighbouring floors.
• Production halls up to 200 m in diameter are covered but ranges can be less if bulky machines, cranes
etc. are part of the interior.
• Outdoor ranges can be up to 300m.
When installing a BS, position it, then walk around to determine cell coverage area either by listening to the speech
quality - whether mutes or crackling sounds are heard in the portable - or measure the RQI indicator using the portables
Service Display facility (see FAULT TRACING 1545-ASB15002Uen).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 32(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

16m

Ground floor corridor

intermediate
floor

Base
Station 1
3,5m

e.g. 40m

7.4.2 Base Stations Cabling

Using a four-pair cable or more-pair cable, the free cable pairs can be used as additional power wires (EPP) to increase
the feeding distance and reduce overall power consumption (by reducing the ohmic resistance) to the BS. The BS can
also be powered by an on-site adapter (refer to section 7.4.7).
Connection of serial communication wires and EPP lines is polarity-independent. SC0-0 and SC0-1 may be
interchanged but SC0-x and SC1-x may not be interchanged. The diagram below shows the wiring principle to each
base station connected to the IC-CU2.
Power feeding of the Base Station
There are three alternatives to power feed (-48V) the Base Station:
• The power feeding can be taken via the IC-CU2 from the back plane in the cabinet. The DIP-switch on the
IC-CU2 is set to OFF.
• From an external power source via the front connector on the IC-CU2 (≤56V). Note the polarity on the
input (see drawing of IC-CU2 board). The switch on the IC-CU2 is set to ON.
• By an AC-adapter (see page 38). The switch on the IC-CU2 should be set to ON but
no power feeding from an external power source via the front connector on the IC-CU2.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 33(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

SC0-a
-48V from V0- 48V external
source
backplane V1+ SC0-b
(optional)
S1 & 2 SC1-a
+ DC
Data/power
SC1-b
connector 1 DC
SC0-a -
EPPa
up to 2 power pairs "EPP
carrying V0- and V1+
CLC x +T EPPb
SC0-b
(one of 4 SC1-a
or 8)
+T SC0-a
SC1-b
EPPa SC0-b
Data/power
connector 2 SC1-a
EPPb
available only on
Base Station SC1-b
KRC NB 301 01/_
IC-CU2 EPPa
Base Station KRC NB 201 03/_
EPPb
and KRC NB 301 01/_

7.4.3 Base station cable delay measurement

After all base stations have been installed, the cable delays must be measured in order to program the base station
delays into the system at initialization time. On IC-CU2s with the revision R1C and higher automatic delay measurement
is performed. In this case no measurement is needed but using the cordless system manager (CSM) go to the menu
"add Base Station" and enter a "1" in the field "delay".

7.4.4 Ranges on cables

The following ranges are given for base stations connected to an IC-CU2. Depending on the cable type ranges depend
on noise levels imposed on the cables. The values stated are maximum achievable ranges:

Type Cable Maximum cable length

Wire diameter (∅) Capacitance Superimposed noise

8 mV/pHz 10 mV/pHz

Twisted pair 0.4 mm 45 nF/km 1.2 km 1.0 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 45 nF/km 1.6 km 1.4 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 120 nF/km 0.9 km 0.8 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 45 nF/km 1.9 km 1.7 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.1 km 1.0 km

Double twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.0 km 0.9 km

(J-Y (St)Y 2×2×0.6)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 34(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7.4.5 Base Station (KRC NB 203 01/_)

The Base Station (BS) is supplied with a drilling template to mount the unit and 2 antennas with TNC connectors.
Mount the unit in a suitable location to provide the best communication coverage.
Use the supplied drilling template and mount the BS with four screws (6 mm Φ). Complete the electrical connection
according to the above drawing. Do not connect to the Base station yet.
IF power is supplied by the adapter (BMLNB 101 04), the screw/slide connector must be used. The serial
communication wires can be connected via the modular jack or the screw/slide connector. A screw with a bundling
cord holder is provided for traction relief to the left of the connection field.The BS starts up if the supply lines deliver
more than 12 VDC.

LEDs

Status of LEDs Meaning

Power LED on (green) BS power on
Reset LED on (red) Power Fail/Reset
TNC connector
LED1 and LED2 on or BS in non
LED1 and LED2 flashing operational mode
Mounting
holes (4x) LED1 and LED2 off BS operational (no traffic)
LED1 off and LED2 on BS operational (traffic)
LED1 on and LED2 off Fatal software error
LED 2
Power

LED 1
Reset

X52 X51
1

RJ 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
screw/slide
modular jack or
connector
EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)

EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

Use connectors 5 & 6 for AC adapter

nc
nc

nc
nc

connection. This input is insensitive to

polarity reversal

Note: ) If the Base Station (KRC NB 201 03/_) is accessible by persons other than trained personnel mount the cover
(SDFNB 101101/_ or similar.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 35(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7.4.6 Base Station (KRCNB 301 01/_)

LED2

Front view Rear view

LED1
RJ 45
modular jack

EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b
SC = Serial Channel

nc
nc
EPP = Express Power Pair Factory testing Data/power Data/power
NC = Not connected (RJ45) (RJ45) (RJ45)

The BS is connected to the radio exchange by means of a standard twisted pair cable. The BS is can be fixed to a
wall, a ceiling, a pole or a beam, by means of the mounting bracket included. When fixing the BS to a wall or ceiling
the included plugs and screws must be used. When fixing it to a pole or beam a (not included) strap a flexible metal
band must be used.
Connectors
• Two 8-pin RJ45 modular jacks for data and powering
• A 6-pin RJ45 modular jack for factory testing
The two data/powering connectors are interconnected on the board.
LEDs
LED 1: Green power LED
LED 2: Three colour LED, see table below

Status of LED2 Meaning

Off Base station operational and no traffic on the base station
Green Base station operational and traffic on the base station
Red Base station is malfunctioning
Amber Base station is OK, but not available (self-test, not initialized,
no communication with radio exchange)
Flashing green All 8 channels are in use
Flashing amber Software is being downloaded to the base station
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 36(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

The BSs can be mounted vertically or horizontally. Mount the BSs at places and positions as determined in the system
configuration plan. The BS must be placed such that it is not facing large metal objects such as large heating pipes,
machines.
Fixing the mounting bracket to a wall
Fix the mounting bracket (see figure below) to the wall as follows:
1. Hold the mounting bracket with its flat side against the wall such that the text ‘TOP’ is the right way up,
and mark the two holes. The minimum distance between the upper hole and the ceiling or any object
above the BS must be as least 65 mm. If the distance is less than 65 mm, the BS cannot be slid onto
the bracket.
2. When using wall plugs, take a ∅ 6 mm drill and drill the two holes and insert the included wall plugs.
3. Position the mounting bracket with its flat side to the wall and fasten it with the two included ∅ 3.5 mm
screws.

Ceiling

≥ 65 mm

TOP

Fixing the mounting bracket to a pole or beam

The mounting bracket can be fixed to a pole (diameter ≥ 45 mm) or a beam (wider than 50 mm) by means of a strap
or flexible metal band less than 30 mm wide. Fix the mounting bracket to a pole or beam such that the text ‘TOP’ is
right way up. The strap or flexible metal band must be purchased locally.

Tied wrongly
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 37(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Cable ducts

When the BS is mounted to the wall, cable ducts can

be used to route the wiring through.
• Fix the cable duct to the wall in one of the
positions shown in left figure.
65 mm
• For safety reasons secure the BS cable to a
57 mm
TOP convenient point at about 30 cm from the base
station.
If for some reason the BS drops, the cable is pulled
out of the base station.

125 mm

15 mm thick cable ducts

75 mm 70 mm

Mounting the Base Station

1. Hold the BS flat against the mounting bracket and move it downwards until it clicks.

Note: After completion of the installation, base stations must be initialized using the cordless system manager.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 38(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

7.4.7 Power Feeding of Base Stations

When using any of the adapters mentioned below care must be taken to configure the IC-CU2 boards for local BS
feeding. If the BSs are to be fed locally the remote power feeding switch on the boards should be set to the position
disconnecting the feeding from the back plane and no external feeding to the board should be connected.
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_)
An AC-adapter to feed the BS locally is available for 230VAC/24VDC (BMLNB 101 04) for all European countries ex-
cept UK and Cyprus. In other countries this has to be purchased locally and must meet the specifications given be-
low:
Output voltage: between 12 V and 56VDC
Output power 7,5W minimum
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 301 01/_)
The 24 VDC adapter (BMLNB 101 09/n) is fitted with a 8-pin RJ45 plug that can be plugged into one of the data/pow-
er connectors of the base station.

7.4.8 Software upgrade

If necessary, the software in the BS can be updated by downloading new software to the BS. Downloading can be
performed without disconnecting the BS. The new software is stored in flash memory.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 39(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

8 LINE NETWORK
The line network for PBX-extensions is to be installed in accordance with the stipulations for standard telephone
networks. Twisted pair cables must be used for the lines and a wire diameter 0.5 mm is recommended in order to
reach full line length,
i.e. 800 m.
No stubs and/or branches may exist on a digital extension lines, as they could cause transmission problems.
• The network lines are to be connected directly to the internal Krone MDF with prefabricated cables (TSR BS
902 0001/800) leading to the boards.
• In case a separate Ericsson MDF has to be installed, prefabricated cables are used between the MDF and
board connectors in the exchange cabinet.
These cables have EURO-connectors mounted at one end for connection to the board.
For connection of ELU-A, ELU-D, BTU-A, BTU-C or BTU-E to the internal MDF use the following cable:
• TSR BS 902 0001/800 is terminated on the board side with standard Ericsson connectors and Krone
connectors on the other side.
For connection of ELU-A, ELU-D, BTU-A, BTU-C or BTU-E to a external MDF use following cables:
• TSR 902 0472/3 (length = 6 m) is equipped with connector only at the exchange side
• TSR 901 0472/2 (length = 15 m) is equipped with connector only at the exchange side
For connection of BTU-D, use the following cable:
• TSR 225 1304/20000, 75 Ω coaxial cable
• or use the same cable as for BTU-A for 120 Ω connection or a double shielded cable TSR 901 0481/20000
(adhere to local requirements).
The cables run into the exchange from below the cabinet.
The cables from the line network are led directly to the MDF in the exchange cabinet.
Secure the cables to the exchange cabinet with the adhesive anchors and bundling cord.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 40(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

8.1 Cables for BDV 113 08

8.1.1 MDF cables

Krone

R-state
Factory Year-W-D
C
A B

a02 a10
colour: wt bl wt or wt gn wt br rd bl rd or rd gn rd br
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 5 ind. 6
(bl) b (or) b (bl) b (or) b
A B a b a b a b a b a b a b a
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a 1 2 3 4 5 6
ind. 3 ind. 4 ind. 7 ind. 8
(gn) b (br) b (gn) b (br) b
ind.1 ind.2 etc. slotting side
wire wrap side

ERICSSON MDF bar

C
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
C
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
A B
connections see above
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 8
Open ends
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

A B
connections see above
length a

part number a usege Cable with 8 pairs, mounted with:

TSR BS 902 0001
/800 800 mm standard cable for integrated MDF
ERICSSON plug and
/1500 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF Krone bar.
/3000 3000 mm MDF cable for existing MDF
TSR 902 0444/1 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF ERICSSON plug
TSR 902 0444/2 3000 mm standard cable for external MDF and ERICSSON MDF distribution bar
TSR 901 0472/3 6000 mm for external MDF, 120Ω for BTU-D ERICSSON plug
TSR 901 0472/2 15000 mm standard cable for external MDF and open ends
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 41(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

8.1.2 Coax cable for BTU-D

B
length a

part number a usege

TSR 225 1304/20000 20000mm coax cable 75 Ω for BTU-D

8.1.3 V.24 cables

only on TSR 902 0466

13 1

25 14

C
A
B
length a

TXD A02 TXD 2

A02 C02 A02 3
0V
A04 0V 7 A04 7
RTS C02 RTS 4
C02 5
A04 C04 DTR
A C04 DTR 6 C04 20

A06 C06 C A06 RXD 2

C A06 RXD 3
CTS C08 CTS 5
C08 4
C06 DCD 8
c06
A08 C08 A08 DSR 20 A08 DSR 6

Wiring of cables: TSR 902 0476 Wiring of cable: TSR 902 0466
TSR 902 0448

part number a usege

TSR 902 0448/1 5000mm cable connecting a PC to CPU-D_/AUX

TSR 902 0466/1 5000mm cable connecting a modem to CPU-D_/AUX
TSR 902 0476/1 5000mm cable connecting a printer to CPU-D_/AUX
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 42(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

8.1.4 Battery connection cable

Factory Year-W-D
R-state
length a

part number a usege

part of NTM BS 101 02 230mm Battery connection cable

8.1.5 Mains power cables

Cable for EUROPE

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 323 2500mm mains power cable 230V 10A

Cable for U.K.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 326 2500mm mains power cable 250V 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 43(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

Cable for Brazil, Mexico, Venezuela etc.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 324 2500mm mains power cable 125V 10A

Cable for Australia, New Zealand, China etc.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 311 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Denmark

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 327 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Italy

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 313 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 44(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

9 MARKING OF CABLES 10 INTERNAL MDF

(Main Distribution Frame)
Each cable that is connected to a PBX type ASB 150
should be marked on the cable’s designation holder The BDV BS 101 01 is factory equipped with a Krone
with the label set SVH 277 003/4, supplied for this snap-in holder accommodating a maximum of 8 Krone
purpose. The cable TSR 902 0444/1 is supplied with a connectors, which can be snapped-in if desired. Use
designation holder, 860 1839, at the EURO-connector. pre-fabricated MDF cables (TSR BS 902 0001/800) to
connect the boards in the swivel shelf with the MDF.
The bottom row is intended for interconnections, e.g.
Label 2: earth connection of the BTU-A_ to the incoming PTT
BTU_

Placing of PBA
03

in PBX earth wires or connections to the CPU I/Os. The Krone

2
01 2 34 connector above is reserved for the trunk lines that
Label 1: can be equipped with surge protection.
6* 2

Type of PBA
Be sure to fasten the cable clip at the bottom of the
Label 3: swivel shelf after installation before mounting the cover
Position of pin
contact unit of the swivel shelf.
on PBA
4
1st An additional MDF holder is available and orderable
Front side of
1/4 that can be mounted within the exchange in the space
designation 2nd provided for the battery case.
holder on cable 1/4
to PBA 3rd Place the cables according to the figure below. Secure
1/4
6 the cables to the MDF cabinet with adhesive anchors
4th and bounding cord.
1/4
NOTE: There must be a ground connection for
This label set contains three label types: the MDF cabinet when surge protectors
are used.
Label 1: This label indicates the abbreviated name
for the PBA to which the cable is to be
connected.
Example of parameter: BTU_

Label 2: There is one 2-digit parameter.

This parameter indicates the position of
the PBA-slot in the PBA where the cable
is to be connected.
Example of parameter: 03
Label 3 There are two 1-digit parameters.
The first parameter indicates the position Krone
of the pin-contact unit on the PBA. connection
The second parameter indicates the 1/4 bar
of the pin contact.
Example of parameters: 6* 2
These three labels indicate where the upper part of the Primarily intended
cable is to be connected and are placed on the front for trunk line use
side of the designation holder. (with surge protectors)
Cables for board Connections
When the label 1 for PBA has a "_" included in the connections: of cables from
name, please enter the correct letter with a marker TSR BS 902 0001/800 line network
pen.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 45(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

11 Door Interface Unit (DIU) sounds loud enough and clear other wise repeat the
procedure.
(BFY BS 10101/1)
• No voice connection to the speaker of the
Installation: telephone.Turn the mic potentiometer screw two
turns clock wise. Speak into the door phone
The DIU is an interface connected via one or two ex- microphone and verify that it is heard in the hand set
tension lines to the ELU-A of the exchange and via a of the telephone otherwise repeat again.
set of wires to the door phone. The DIU should be
mounted indoors on a dry wall. The door phone can be Settings on the board
of any commercially available type as long as it meets
the requirements listed in the 1555-ASB15002Uen OPENER
SYSTEM OVERVIEW under section 7 Technical Data 8 sec
6 sec Ext. B x17
for DIU. K1
4 sec
1 sec TO
D TIMEOUT Extension
Connection: 3 min B (door
2 min opener)
use cable diameter ≥0.6mm 1 min

The wires to the speaker and microphone should be (lead directly to door opener C
button if already wired)
via two twisted pairs in a separate cable. Caution
x12 DO TO
when connecting a polarity dependant microphone Extension
check polarity on connector x1. In another cable make A (voice)
Ext. A x18
the connections to the door bell button, door opener DIU (BFY BS 101 01)
and key lights etc. This is to minimise disturbances on Microphone sensitivity
the microphone line. The wires to the door opener level setting

carry more current and should have a diameter greater Mic

A B
than 0,6 mm. The length between door phone and DIU
Loudspeaker
should be less than 50 m. The length between door LS MIC
+ - - Volume BELL
phone and exchange should be less than 500m. x2 x1 x5
+
The connector X18 is used for speech connection be-
tween DIU and exchange. The connector X17 is used
to activate the door opener. If the door opener wiring
already exists the X17 connection can be omitted and spkr mic
the connection X12 leads to a existing button. door
door phone bell button
Pressing the door phone button (connection X5) acti-
vates the DIU and the programmed extension rings door
(see Facility Description 15534-ASB15002Uen). The opener
interface stays active for the preset time selected un- mains 8...48VAC
der "C" and shuts off after this time has elapsed.
Transformer

11.0.1 Adjustments of DIU Microphone connection with polarity dependent

A
6 VDC supply for microphones with amplifiers.
The microphone level is factory set but under certain
conditions the line attenuation can exceed expectations B The loudspeaker volume level is factory set. To
adjust turn the Loudspeaker potentiometer.
resulting only in one way speech connection or clipping
of the voice between extension and door phone. In this C Timeout for the interface to shut off. The jumper se-
case cautious change of microphone level setting has lects intervals between 1...2...3 minutes.
to be performed. The potentiometers range is D Set door opener activation time 1...4...6...8 sec.
• If the voice in the speaker of the door phone sounds
too dim or is clipped turn the mic potentiometer
screw two turns counter clock wise. Speak into the
telephone microphone and verify that the speaker
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 46(46)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 01 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1998-05-29 L

12 INSTALLATION OF ALARM INTERFACE UNIT

Line to exchange
a

DBY BS 410 01/1

nc ba a b bb nc

line to exchange

ba and bb are the

connectors to the
alarm button
nc are not used wires

wall outlet
a RPM BS 130 002/01
connect to the line input on the telephone

Line/Alarm (to wall outlet) Line out (to telephone) Optional Alarm

1 1 1
RJ12 RJ14 RJ14
Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 not used 1 not used 1 button a
2 button a 2 a 2 not used
3 a 3 b 3 not used
4 b 4 not used 4 button b
5 button b
6 not used

The ALARM INTERFACE UNIT is an optional equipment mounted in the case bottom of the DBC 21x telephones.
This equipment is used in the hospitality area to enable distress notification from e.g. a bathroom. A normally closed
switch is installed and the two terminals are connected to the pins (button a and button b) on the option unit. The con-
nection can be made in the wall outlet then the wiring shown above applies. In case of another type of wiring the con-
nector Optional alarm can be used.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
SEA/EBBMP Stangelberger SEA/EBBX/F 1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
SEA/EBBMP 1999-07-15 A ASB 150 02
Database reference
1531-BDVBS10105Uen-1-A.emf

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION

EXCHANGE CABINET

BDV BS 101 05
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Contents Page 6.16 VMU-D (ROF 157 5117/1) . . . . . . . 28

7 INTEGRATED CORDLESS. . . . . . 29
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
7.1 Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.1 Supplementary documents. . . . . . . . 3
7.2 Traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
7.3 IC-CU2 (ROF 157 5131/_) (GAP-Protocol)
2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY4 31
3 HOW TO OPEN THE CABINET. . . . 6 7.4 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_ and
4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 KRCNB 301 03/_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1 Mounting of the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 LINE NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.2 Safety and EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8.1 Cables for BDV 101 05 . . . . . . . . . 41

4.3 Access to the boards . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9 MARKING OF CABLES . . . . . . . . 46

5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . 8 9.1 External MDF SXK 106 4139/1 . . . 46

5.1 Replacement of the power 10 Door Interface Unit (DIU)

supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (BFY BS 10101/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

5.2 Power feeding with an external DC 11 INSTALLATION OF ALARM

supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

6 ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6.1 Power supervision of ELU-A (ROF 157
5114/_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
6.2 Connection of CM-Boards . . . . . . . 10
6.3 System Power Consumption. . . . . . 10
6.4 BTU-A (ROF 157 5110/_) and
BTU-A2 (ROF 157 5120/_) . . . . . . . 12
6.5 Power failure circuit (PFC) . . . . . . . 12
6.6 BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/_). . . . . . . . 13
6.7 BTU-B (ROF 157 5121/_) . . . . . . . . 14
6.8 BTU-B2 (ROF 157 5121/_) . . . . . . . 14
6.9 BTU-D (ROF 157 5112/1) and
REG (ROF 157 5112/2) . . . . . . . . . 16
6.10 BTU-E (ROF 157 5113/_) . . . . . . . . 18
6.11 CPU-D_ (ROF 157 5118/_) and
AUX_(ROF157 5119/_). . . . . . . . . . 22
6.12 CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) . . . . . . 23
6.13 ELU-A and ELU-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6.14 MFU (ROF 157 5132/_) . . . . . . . . . 26
6.15 VMU-HD (ROF 157 5126/1)
(ROF 157 5126/3) w. Flash Card . . 28
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

1 GENERAL 1 A protective resistor of 10 Ω/1W

(REN 195 42/1) connected in series
Exchange cabinet BDV BS 101 05 is designed to be between cabinet and MDF
furnished with Printed Board Assemblies (hereafter = 2 An overvoltage arrester (gas discharge
boards or PBAs) belonging to ERICSSON’s PBX- tube) for quenching surges to protective
system ASB 150 02. System functions, desired by the ground should be installed on the network
customer, are realised with appropriate boards and side of the protective resistor.
system programming.
The PBX is powered by a switched mode power supply businessphone
MDF
(SMPS) that is available for two voltage versions. The
standard version is an AC/DC converter. The version
with battery charger offers the same facility but addi-
tionally provides battery back-up or can be powered by
an external DC-source. The SMPS for 230V is addi-
tionally available with power factor correction (PFC).
Due to the limited load of the cabinet’s power supply
units, the definitive board configuration in a cabinet
must follow the prerequisites in section 6.3. Overvoltage arresters
Protective (NGC 402 01)
After installation the PBX shall be made operational in resistors 10 Ω/1W Housed in:
accordance with the stipulations that apply for system overvoltage protection
(REN 195 42/1) Protective cassette (769 027/3)
ASB 150 02. See document START OF OPERATION ground
(1537-ASB 150 02). The cabinet is adapted for boards Note: Make sure the MDF is really connected
fitted with brackets containing screws. Only boards to protective ground.
equipped with these brackets must be installed. These Figure: Line protection
screws must always be fastened to ensure a proper
ground connection.
Every cabinet’s board position could be used for arbi- 1.1 Supplementary documents
trary furnishing with boards belonging to PBX system
ASB 150 02 but the first position in the first cabinet • Document collection EN/LZB 103 1233
must be reserved for the CPU-D_.
• INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
It is advisable to protect trunk lines with extra (1531-BML BS 101 01) for the power supply,
overvoltage protectors, especially in geographical equipped with battery charger
areas that are highly exposed to lightning.
Any lines connected to the PBX that are subjected to
excess voltage (transients) in conjunction with e.g.
1.2 Tools
lightning discharges must be equipped with excess
voltage protection, refer to figure: Line protection. The In addition to customary installation tools, the following
excess voltage protection can not be installed inside a is recommended:
BDV BS 101 05 cabinet but should be mounted in an • Use the appropriate connection tool 769 027/2 to
integrated or external MDF. connect the cables in the internal MDF.
Special precautions must be taken to analogue • Use the appropriate slotting tool LSY 138 252 to
extension lines that are led outdoors, in order to connect the cables to the external
prevent the analogue extension boards secondary MDF SXK 106 4139/1.
protection device from blowing in case of lightning.
• Board extractor for PBAs (handle LTD 117 02
Each branch on the extension line must have: and bottom LTD 117 12)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

t.
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
th
r
fo
ank
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

t.
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
rth
fo
nk
a
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

3 HOW TO OPEN THE 4 INSTALLATION

CABINET
The PBX can be delivered as a customer configured
Unpack the exchange cabinet. unit or the add-in boards can be delivered separately.
The cabinet is always equipped with a power supply,
Check that everything has been received according to suitable for the local mains. Please check the label
the delivery note and that nothing has been damaged stating the permitted mains voltage. The cabinet is to
during the transport. be mounted on an indoor wall. A mains outlet must be
The cabinet cover is latched. To open reach inside the provided near the equipment and shall be easily
center cable duct from below and push lever up gently accessible. Connection to earth (refer to 4.2) is
to unlock then remove the cabinet’s front cover. For necessary for safe operation to discharge lightning
details of the bottom view of cabinet see page 8. strikes. The premises shall comply with the following
prerequisites:
• The air shall be free from dust and smoke
• Environmental conditions according to
businessphone
ETS 300 019 (1-4) (Temperature shall be
between + 5°C and +40°C and relative humidity
may vary between 15% and 80%)
• The PBX shall not be exposed to direct sunlight

4.1 Mounting of the cabinet

Attach the proper label at the bottom of the cabinet

before hanging up the cabinet (refer to section 4.2 on
2 page 7 for the position). The label must comply to the
SMPS installed and the local mains voltage level.
1
The cabinet’s wall mounting plate is located on the rear
of the cabinet during transport. Take into consideration
1 Lift latch to release the cabinet cover
the normal working height above the floor (about 1.30
2 Then remove the cabinet cover. m to the lower edge of the cabinet) and leave enough
room for access on both sides of the cabinet. To pull
out the cabinet’s wall mounting plate remove the screw
C below the swivel shelf (refer to next page). Then
position the mounting plate where you want to mount
the cabinet, mark and drill three 8 mm holes. Insert the
enclosed wall plugs and screw tight the cabinet’s wall
Overall dimensions of the cabinet:
mounting plate.
• 400 x 500 x 155 (H x W x D in mm).
TOP
Screw hole for screw (C)
to hold
wall mounting plate
during transport

figure: wall mounting plate

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

4.2 Safety and EMC

To fulfil electrical safety requirements IEC 950 and Attach label delivered with the PSU!
EN 60950, the exchange must be connected to
protective earth via a flexible wire with a cross

168
sectional area of at least 6 mm2.
Local requirements shall be adhered to.
Label: LZFBS 083 013/3L03 Latch to release cover
The electrical connection must be carried out by
authorised personnel.
Note: The mains current rating stated on the label is the
A maximum current of the charger version.

Bottom view of cabinet BDV BS 101 05

B
SWIVEL- All line interfaces in the PBX are protected in
Shelf SHELF accordance with K.21 (voltage transients up to 1.5 kV).
cover
Turn BTU-A, BTU-A2, BTU-B, BTU-C, BTU-D, BTU-E and
out C
MFU are working with interface TNV.
PSU
All other boards and the V.24 port work with interface
SELV.

4.2.1 EMC
A
snap-on The ferrites, with the ERICSSON ordering number
wrist strap STF 82 601, should be situated close to the slot where
connector the cables are led out of the cabinet. Two turns through
Connection
for protective the ferrite core are sufficient to comply with EN 55022
earth Class B and to avoid disturbances in non-industrial,
residential (home) usage.
cross sectional area greater than 6 mm2
to protective earth 4.3 Access to the boards

NOTE:If the earth is not connected, NOTE: Make sure that a sound ground connection to
a possible strike of lightning the exchange has been established. Other-
might cause a fire! wise this can be hazardous in case of light-
ning. Use a grounding wrist strap when
handling PBAs sensitive to electrostatic dis-
C Remove this screw located behind the swivel shelf
to access the wall mounting plate charges.

Before operating, make sure that the chassis is

connected to a hard-wired protective earth. Turn out the transport screws (A) about 1 cm at the top
and bottom of the swivel shelf. See figure in section
Note: The wrist strap must have a 1MOhm series 4.2. Hold the bottom of the shelf, lift the shelf slightly
protection resistor to comply to the safety and turn the swivel shelf counter clockwise (ccw). Turn
standards. If this resistor is missing, then the screw (B) two turns at the top of the shelf cover
accidentally touching live wires can be leathal. and remove the cover.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 5.1 Replacement of the power

supply unit
The SMPS for the cabinet are AC/DC switch mode
power supplies complying to ETS 61 000-3-2 (power On delivery the PSU is already installed in the cabinet.
factor correction but only for the 230V version) for two The procedure of how to dismount the unit is
mains voltages. Please check whether the label states described below.
the proper mains voltage as required. For mains with
230V to 250V AC, two versions are available: a Switch off the PSU (A) and unplug the mains
from the wall outlet. If the unit is a PSU with
• BML BS 101 02/1 (PSU 230V standard)
battery charger, disconnect the DC supply line to
• BML BS 101 02/3 (PSU 230V std. w. PFC) the batteries and unplug the alarm connector on
the unit.
• BML BS 101 01/1 (PSU 230V equipped with
battery charger). b Disconnect the DC supply cord (D) from the
swivel shelf.
• BML BS 101 01/3 (PSU 230V equipped with
battery charger and PFC). c Unscrew the transport screw (B).
For mains with 115V to 127V AC two versions are d Push the PSU from the bottom and turn out the
available: PSU clockwise, unhinge and take it out. Then
pull off the mains plug at the bottom of the PSU
• BML BS 101 02/2 (PSU 115V standard)
and disconnect the ground wire.
• BML BS 101 01/2 (PSU 115V equipped with
e Install the PSU in the reverse manner.
battery charger).
When installing a power supply unit with battery charg-
The PSUs deliver 30 W on the PBA supply voltages
er and the backup battery, please refer to the INSTAL-
and 101 W on the 48 V supply voltage.
LATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML BS 101 01).
Warning: The power switch does not disconnect
from mains. The mains cord must be unplugged to
disconnect the mains.
The PSU is equipped with a mains fuse rated (D) (B)
250VAC 6,3 A T.
NOTE: This fuse NGH 258 03/630 can be ordered
from Ericsson but is a non-accessible and non-user Power switch (A) Label
serviceable part. Only authorised personnel is does not
disconnect
allowed to change the fuse. Contact the local unit from
supplier in this matter. mains.
Standby only
Battery backup time
The power consumption of the telephones and base
stations on the 48 V should be less than 2.1 A for all
PSU types. The batteries in the integrated battery case
have a capacity of 2Ah. Using fresh batteries, a
backup time of 20 minutes is guaranteed and
depending on the system configuration even longer
Ground
backup times might be achieved.
Mains power cord plug
IEC 320 C17
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 9(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

5.2 Power feeding with an external DC supply

When the PBX is supplied with power by an external battery with 48V nom. (44 - 56V), the installation of a power
supply equipped with a battery charger (BML BS 101 01/_) is required. The DC supply is connected directly to the
PSU.
An externally accessible fuse 250VAC 6,3 A T is provided on the PSU, but additionally a fuse must be installed in the
supply line with DC current switching capability greater than 160 A.
Note: To prevent arcing never connect the DC source when the PSU has not started-up.
Use the mains to power up or use an external switch to connect the DC source. This is a precaution to minimise the
contact loads on the plug. For further details see INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML BS 101 01).
As battery operation often requires different preconditions, only an overview can be provided with regard to battery
capacity/charging capacity. The batteries should be supplied locally. The type is described in detail in INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTION (1531-BML BS 101 01).

6 ALLOCATION
In principle, all board positions in cabinet BDV BS 101 05 can be used for arbitrary configurations with PBAs
belonging to PBX-system ASB 150 02.
The boards are equipped with ground brackets on the top and bottom. Make sure to fasten the boards with the
supplied screws during installation.
There are recommendations for configurations in order to simplify operation and maintenance. For further information
see document collection EN/LZB 103 1233.
Sub-equipped boards:
Install sub-equipped boards in the last position after the standard boards to enable easy upgrading without having to
re-number trunks and extensions.

6.1 Power supervision of ELU-A (ROF 157 5114/_)

The board is equipped with an automatic traffic limiter restricting the internal power dissipation on the board to a
maximum of 12W. This depends on both the line length and the number of lines busy.
If the power consumption exceeds the limit, no further lines can access service, and at least two lines have to go on
hook, for all lines to work normally again.
When connecting external voice systems a maximum of 8 lines are recommended on each board. The remaining
lines on the board are to be connected to low-traffic extensions.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 10(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.2 Connection of CM-Boards

Connect the correct type of call metering board, according to the figure below, on BTU-A board ROF 157 5110/_ or
ROF 157 5127/_ and in the same fashion on the BTU-C board ROF 157 5111/_. The BTU-C cannot be equipped
with a CM50 board as the flat ribbon cable cannot be connected and CM12/16 (ROA 219 5135/1).

Line 0 - 1

CM-
board

Line 2 - 3

Note: When installing a CM50-board connect the

cable before mounting the CM50-board. The
BTU-A board must also be connected to
Line 4 - 5 earth.

The following boards are available CM50 ROA 219 5064/1, with flat ribbon cable and CM12/16 ROA 219 5135/1 or
ROA 219 5062/1 without cable.

6.3 System Power Consumption

The power demand of the system comprises the sum of the current demands of all extensions, base stations etc.
This total current has to be delivered by the power supply. Choose the one delivering the rated current with a suitable
margin for add-on equipment depending on the installation site.

6.3.1 Base Station Power Demand

To minimise the power dissipation on the serial communication wires, EPP should be used extensively. Up to 4 BS
can be connected to the IC-CU2.
The total 48 VDC current load of the BS on the power supply has to be calculated as follows:
Cable STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP This table states the current demand in mA for a Base Sta-
length 0,5 mm ∅ 0,6 mm ∅ 0,5 mm ∅ 0,6 mm ∅ tion depending on the cable length and cable diameter.
0m 104 104 104 104 77 104 104 104
100m 110 106 108 106 83 106 108 106
Calculation example:
200m 114 110 110 108 87 110 110 108 Line length to Base Station: 200m
300m 121 112 114 109 94 112 114 109 Resistance of loop: 0.18 Ω/m
400m 129 115 118 110 103 115 118 110 Cable diameter (φ): 0,6 mm
500m 119 112 119 112
600m
Assuming 4 Base Stations are already
121 114 121 114
700m 125 117 125 117
connected they consume a current of: 440 mA
800m 129 118 129 118
Power demand taken from Power Calcu-
900m 133 121 133 121 lations below, for telephones: 984 mA
1,0km 139 123 139 123
Total load on power supply: 1424 mA
1,1km 146 125 146 125
1,2km 152 127 152 127 This total load for the exchange can be
1,3km 160 129 160 129 supplied by the power supply as it is less
1,4km 171 131 171 131 than 2.1A.
1,5km 183 135 183 135
1,6km 204 137 204 137
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 11(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.3.2 Extension Power Demand

TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION

Typ (mA) Max (mA) Typ (mA) Max (mA)
BASIC DBC 210 14 35 OPERATOR DBC 214 40 120
DBC 199 25 35 DBC 663 67 110
CONSOLE
ECONOMY DBC 601
DBC 751 27
38 32
DBC 214 with 2 DBY 409 01 35 70
ECONOMYplus DBC 211 14 35 DBC 214 with 4 DBY 409 02*) 35 70
DBC 201 30 50 ANALOGUE 40
(in active state)
STANDARD DBC 212 14 35
30 50 TAU 2610 4 4
DBC 202
DBC
DBC 631
752 65 70 Desktop Adapter 23
50 73
DBC 213 35 70 BTU-B (S-interface
EXECUTIVE 35 70 per physical link) 50
DBC 203
DBC 662 70 73 BTU-C
DBC 753 75 index (/1,/2) 1) (per trunk) 14 35
DBC 213 with 2 DBY 409 01 42 70
35 70 50
Radio base station: refer to table above
DBC 213 with 4 DBY 409 02*)
1
) provides current on trunk lines in active state to public exchange.
The maximum values for telephones are reached when all LEDs are lit and if available, loudspeaking is on at max.
volume.
*) with connected external power supply.
Power calculation example

LINE CURRENT
QUANTITY Calculation example:
EQUIPMENT (mA)
DBC 210 3 42 3 x DBC 210
selected 5 x DBC 201
DBC 201 5 150 line equipment 13 x DBC 202
10 x DBC 203
DBC 202 13 390 1 x DBC 663
Total: 32 system telephones
DBC 203 10 350
DBC 214 1 40
TOTAL 32 984

The calculation above shows how to calculate the current demand for a given installation. This amount of current has
to be supplied by the installed power supply.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 12(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.4 BTU-A (ROF 157 5110/_) and 6.5 Power failure circuit (PFC)
BTU-A2 (ROF 157 5120/_)
In the event of mains failure and if no battery back-up
On delivery from the factory both contacts are in the OFF is available for the PBX, there are normally 2 lines on
position, and the line is a normal trunk. the BTU-A and BTU-C (see under BTU-C on next
page) board which automatically switch the trunk lines
When both contacts on a DIP-switch are set to position to analogue telephones connected to this board.
ON, the line is to be regarded as a music source input.
On power failure, these telephones will automatically
Different contact positions are not allowed. be connected to the public exchange.
Note: Only lines 4 - 7 can be used as a music source It is also possible to use the power failure telephones
input. Not available on BTU-A subequipped ROF during normal operation, if an ELU-A board is in-
157 5127/_. stalled.
.
BTU-A & BTU-C1
The DIP-switch is shown
with both contacts in 85
OFF position PFb BTC b ELUA
ON a

Line 4 PFa

1 2 Power failure set

Line 5
La
86 Trunk
Line 6 Lb Indicator

87
Line 7 Relay shown in power fail position
88

Connection field 6
A C
LA0
18 LA1
LB0
20 LB1
LA2
22 LA3
LB2
24 LB3 Line wires for
26 LA5 connection to
LA4 Public Exchange
LB4 28 LB5
*)
LA6
30 LA7

LB6
32 LB7

*) Not available on sub-equipped board see below

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 13(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Connection field 4 6.6 BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/_)

Not always mounted
(market-dependent) Connection of Connection field 4 and 6
A C analogue telephone
PFa0 18 a0 RED
Connection to YELLOW
4 PFb0 20 b0 ELU-A board GREEN The index number
refers to the individual
on the board
PFa1 22 a1

PFb1 24 b1 power failure (field 4)

A C
PFa0 a0
18 On the BTU-A2 the PFb0 b0
bottom half of this
20 connector is used
to connect to PTT
22 signalling ground
trunk lines (field 6)
24
A C
Connection La_0 La_1
to analogue Connection to Lb_0 Lb_1
telephone(s) ELU-A board La_2 La_3
A C
Lb_2 Lb_3
PFa2 26 a0 Only mounted if the BTU-A
La_4 La_5
has 4 PFC circuits (market Lb_4 Lb_5
PFb2 28 b0 dependent). La_7
La_6
Lb_6 Lb_7
PFa3 30 a1 This connector is used
for PFC circuits on the
PFb3 32 b1 BTU-A2
Earth connection on BTU-A2 (Austria only)
Some markets require an earth connection of the in-
The BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/1) features eight incoming
coming PTT earth (functional earth) to the exchange.
trunk lines with DID. The first four individuals can also
This is provided on the connector installed above the
be used for outgoing traffic.
PFC circuit connector on pins A22, A24, C22 and C24.
Use an extra Krone bar to connect the PTT earth wires
to the wires going to the board connector. BTU-A & BTU-C1

PFb BTC b ELUA

a

PFa

Power failure set

La
Trunk
Lb Indicator

Relay shown in power fail position

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 14(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.7 BTU-B (ROF 157 5121/_) 6.8 BTU-B2 (ROF 157 5121/_)

Applies for indices 1 and 3 Applies for indices 4 and 5

The BTU-B provides connection for up to 8 physical
links and every physical link can be configured as a S-
or T-interface in point-to-point or multi-point mode. On
the S-interface every link provides remote power feed-
ing with 40V/50 mA = 2W and connection for up to 8
terminals. 418

C
ON

D
410 411
418
412 413

414 415

416 417
ON

ON

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

410 411 B Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 4
ON

ON

412 413
DIP-switches position 410-417
414 415
These switches control S- and T-interface termination
ON

ON

416 417 and S-interface power feeding on the link 0...7.

On factory delivery all

ON

ON

switches are set to OFF

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 1 Connects power feeding ground
4

B Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 2 Connects -40V for power feeding
3

Connects 100 Ω receive side termination

2

C Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

Connects 100 Ω send side termination
ON

D Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/4

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 15(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Note: at the end of each line a termination resistor (refer to documentation of the TE) is also equipped
must be installed (e.g. in the last wall outlet). with a SBCX or equivalent.
Switch 1 selects the termination on the transmitter in-
terface and switch 2 selects the termination on the re- 1 km (standard range)
TE SBCX
ceiver interface. Switches 3 and 4 enable remote pow- and up to 2 km with
er feeding to ISDN terminals connected to a link. When TEs equipped with SBCX

connected as S-interface switches 1...4 should be set TE TE TE

to ON. up to 500 m (standard range)
SBCX
and up to 1.5 km with
TE TE TE
Settings of the S-interface relevant for TEs equipped with SBCX
BTU-B
board indices -3,-4,-5 Ranges on the extended passive bus

DIP-switch position 418 Short passive bus

d1
When selecting which link is to be configured
as a S-/Q-/T-interfaces, start with switch:
d4
with TR BTU-B
Line pairs: in outlet
d3
Q/T-interface 0+1
4

TE TE TE

2+3 d4 - up to 1m
3

OFF... Q/T-Interface d1 - 150m to 250m (standard range)

ON ...S-Interface d3 - line to terminal up to 10m
4+5
2

Extended passive bus

ON

6+7
1

S-interface d1
d2
On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF
d4
with TR BTU-B
in outlet d3
Note: When selecting S- or T-interfaces start by
TE
setting the T-interfaces using switches 4, 3, 2 TE TE
and 1 in consecutive order then set the S- d1 - up to 500m (standard range), d2 - between terminals
1,5 km on 30 nF cables with 25 to 50 meters
interfaces starting with switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. TEs equipped with SBCX
d3 - line to terminal up to 10m d4 - up to 1m
Settings of the S-interface
Abbreviations:
Select the configuration of the interface in RASC :
TE Terminal Equipment
Extended passive bus default setting TR Termination Resistor (installed at the end of the
and Short passive bus. interface line. Use outlets with resistor mounted)
Ranges on the interface Outlet according to IEC 603-7 with termination

The BTU-B is equipped with the S/T Bus Interface Cir- Outlet according to IEC 603-7 without termina-
cuit eXtended (SBCX). This circuit offers the advan- tion
tage of covering a higher attenuation on cables.
The standard S/T-interface specification considers ca-
bles with 6.5 dB attenuation equivalent to about 1000m
cable length in a single terminal configuration.
Using the S/T Bus Interface Circuit eXtended (SBCX)
up to13 dB line attenuation can be covered. The figure
below shows the ranges using standard 0.6 mm diam-
eter twisted pair unshielded cables with a capacitive
load of max. 30nF per km and the terminal equipment
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 16(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.9 BTU-D (ROF 157 5112/1) and

Connection field 6 REG (ROF 157 5112/2)
A C
T0A
02 R0A
T0B
04 R0B A
T1A
06 R1A
T1B The DIP-switch is
08 R1B shown with
T2A B
10 R2A both contacts in
T2B OFF position
12 R2B
T3A ON
14 R3A
197
T3B S/T-Interface for
16 R3B 200
T4A connecting trunks
18 R4A 1 2
and S-terminals
T4B
20 R4B
T5A
22 R5A
T5B
24 R5B
T6A 26 R6A

T6B 28 R6B

T7A 30 R7A

T7B 32 R7B

199
Wall outlet connection

EIA/TIA 568 Wiring Schemes

198
4 5
Pin desig- NT function: TE function:
6 3 nation (polarity of remote (polarity of remote
power feeding) power feeding)
8 1
5 Transmit (-) Receive (-)
7 2 4 Transmit (-) Receive (-)

3 Receive (+) Transmit (+)

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/1
6 Receive (+) Transmit (+)
Wiring side of 8-pole
wall outlet e.g. B Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/2
1 Power sink 3 (+) Power source 3(+)
KRONE RJ-K LN Power source 3(-)
2
optional

Power sink 3 (-)

7 Power source 2(-) Power sink 2(-)

8 Power source 2(+) Power sink 2(+)
6.9.1 DIP-switches in position 197 and 200
S-interface in T-interface on
socket plug
1 Depending on the firmware used, this board enables
either ISDN or CAS function. The PROM set is availa-
ble for CAS (LZY203 2212/1) or ISDN PRA
(LZY203 2213/1). DIP-switch pos. 197 on BTU-D se-
lects the register function of the board. The switch 200
is reserved for future use.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 17(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

For ranges exceeding 6 dB attenuation additional digit-

197/1 197/2 FUNCTION al data transmission equipment is required. Line Ter-
OFF OFF digital trunk MFC only minating Unit (LTU) ASB 501 04 is available for such
ON digital trunk MFE BTU-D purposes.
ON OFF Register MFC BTU-D Connection field 6
ON Register MFE or
REG. A C
18 RING_OUT
19 TIP_OUT
20
Connection for 75 Ω
6.9.2 DIP-switches in positions 198 and 199 22 RING_IN coaxial cable
23 TIP_IN
24
Selection of ground strapping for the coax 75 Ω or se- 26 LA1
lection of the 120 Ω twisted pair interface. Outgoing
28 LB1 wires Connection for
120 Ω twisted pairs
198/1 198/2 FUNCTION 30 LA2 Incoming
199/1 199/2 32 wires
LB2
OFF OFF 120 Ω connection1) 0V
OFF ON screen connected to ground There are specific requirements for the digital interface
ON OFF screen connected to ground wiring to meet the demands of EMC.
via 1nF capacitor If a twisted pair connection should be installed and the
requirements of EN 55022, class B have to be fulfilled,
1) Factory setting a ferrite is available with the ERICSSON ordering
number STF 82 601. Taking the cable and making
On factory delivery the switches are set to OFF-posi- three turns around the ferrite core meets the demand
tion = no ground thus enabling 120 Ω interface with a of sufficient noise reduction. The ferrite should be
twisted pair cable. These DIP-switches connect the situated close to the slot where the cables are led out
75 Ω interface coax screen to ground, either directly to of the cabinet. In most cases this cable is supplied by
0V or via a 1 nF capacitor. DIP-switch 198 switches the the PTT and should not be fed via the MDF.
receiver and 199 the transmitter side. The screen shall
normally be grounded on the transmitter side. Normal- Some markets (e.g. Austrian PTT) require the use of a
ly, the screen on the reception side is not connected to double-shielded interface cable. The outer shield
ground. Refer to local market requirements should be connected to frame earth and the inner
shield should be connected to 0V on the board. A 20 m
Ranges on the interface of the BTU-D long standard cable is available with the ERICSSON
This interface covers the short distance to the next NT ordering number TSR 901 0481/20000.
or Line Terminating Unit as the end point of a public or
private network. The range is only defined in terms of
the covered attenuation by the interface that is 6 dB. If
required choose cables with low attenuation to achieve
a maximum distance.

Coax 75 Ω and twisted pair 120 Ω interface

d1

Line terminating unit BTU-D

d1 - The line length depends on the cable type used. The board
allows 6 dB cable attenuation at 1.024 MHz. Check cable
attenuation at 1,024 MHz per 100m.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 18(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.10 BTU-E (ROF 157 5113/_)

SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS M-WIRE CONNECTION SETTINGS

2-wire connection 4-wire connection APPLICATION SPEECH M-WIRES
106...406 108/308 106...406 108/308
on on on on PAGING S6..off
2-wireS7..off
S8..off
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 AMERICAN S6, S7 and S8
4-wire
E&M see local
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SIGNALLING requirements
DOUBLE 4-wire S6..on
INDIVIDUAL 0 INDIVIDUAL 1 M-WIRE S7..on
SIGNALLING S8..off
uses switches 106 and 108/1 uses switches 206 and 108/2
CAILHO E&M S6..off
INDIVIDUAL 2 INDIVIDUAL 3 4-wire S7..off
SIGNALLING
S8..off
uses switches 306 and 308/1 uses switches 406 and 308/2
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 S6..off
SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS 4-wire S7..off
Only on /2 boards S8..off
Switches select between 2- or 4-wire speech
connection. Two individuals share switches 108 S6 connects -48V to M1 terminal via 6.2 Kohm
and 308. S7 connects 0V to M0 wire locally.
On boards with Rev. R2A or higher these switch- S8 connects 0V to M20-wire.
es are replaced by relays which are set automat-
ically by programming the filter coefficients.

Connection field 4 and 6 at front of BTU-E_

Speech (field 4) RED
YELLOW
A C GREEN
LA_0 18 LC_0 YELLOW
LB_0 20 LD_0 GREEN
308
LA_1 22 LC_1
108
LA & LB - 2-wire send/re-
LB_1 24 LD_1 ceive or 4-wire send.
LA_2 26 LC_2 LC & LD - 4-wire receive.
LB_2 28 LD_2
LA_3 30 LC_3
0

LB_3
32
LD_3 106
INDIVIDUALS

Signalling (field 6)
206
1

A C
M2_0 E2_0
306
2

M20_0 E20_0
M2_1 E2_1
M20_1 E20_1
406
3

1 M2_2 E2_2
M20_2 E20_2
M2_3 E2_3 109
S6 S7 S8
3

M20_3 E20_3
INDIVIDUALS

M1_0 E1_0
209
1 2

M0_0 E0_0
1

M1_1 E1_1
on

309
2

M0_1 E0_1
1 M1_2 E1_2
3

M0_2 E0_2 409

M1_3 E1_3
M0_3 E0_3

1 M20_ and M0_ can be switched by S7 and S8 to 0V on M-WIRE SETTINGS

the BTU-E_ locally.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 19(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.10.1 Paging connection

The figure shows how to connect the paging equipment Ericall Contactor with 2 wire speech. The PBX sends paging
information to paging system (pin 6A18) using M1 contact, and information about ’paging in progress’ or ’paging
equipment not present’ is received on the E1-wire (pin 6C18) from the paging equipment.

Switch settings
on This switch setting is used for
signalling on E1 and M1.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX Paging equipment

Z
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

S5 4A20 LB

0V

S7 M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V

Figure showing Paging equipment and 2-wire speech with ’loop connection’ of the E&M-wires.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 20(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.10.2 Four-wire speech connection

The four-wire speech and signalling connection has the benefit of not needing additional signalling wires. There are
two different types of signalling supported:
Cailho E&M-signalling (balanced battery). The two way signalling utilises common mode DC pulses via the centre
tap of the transformer. On one side a detector is connected between the -48 VDC and the centre tap of the
transformer. The other end uses opto relay M4 to switch the line to 0V (Ground). The detector reads the current flow
to ground every time M4 closes.
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 with 2280 Hz tones. In this case no DC signalling is used, but instead signalling is performed by
switching on and off a 2280 Hz tone, which is detected by a tone receiver on the other side. This is only available on
index 2 boards.

Switch settings
on This switch setting inhibits signalling on E1 and M1. Only AC or DC
signalling on the four wire speech connection is used.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

2280 Hz PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
M4
0V
Detector
autom. 2/4wire

-48V
DSLAC

1uF 560 Ω 4A20 LB

0V
2280 Hz 4C18 LC
detector

Detector -48V 0V

4C20 LD
0V

Figure showing Cailho E&M signalling and CEPT L1 or SSAC 15 with tone signalling
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 21(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.10.3 E&M-signalling

Signalling on E & M wires is done either using one or two E&M pairs depending on what is required. Using just E1
and M1 is a very common practice. The American E&M signalling where the M1 wire toggles between -48VDC and
0V can be mentioned here.
Double E&M signalling requires the E1/M1 wires for the signalling of information and the E2/M2 wires indicate
blocking of the connection. The E1/M1-wires are used for signalling and E2/M2-wires are used for blocking. The
figure shows 0V connection to the M-wires in both ends.

Switch settings
Standard E & M signalling Double E & M signalling
on This switch setting is used on This is the switch setting when
for signalling on E1 and M1. E1, E2, M1 and M2 are used for
signalling.
1 2 3 1 2 3
S6 S7 S8 S6 S7 S8

Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

4A20 LB
0V
4C18 LC

S8** 4C20 LD
0V
M3**
-48V **application specific
toggles between 0 and -48VDC
S7 (e.g. American signalling)
M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

-48V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V
S6 M2
0V 6A02 M2 E2 Detector -48V

6A04 M20 E20 0V

6C02 E2 M2
-48V Detector 0V

0V 6C04 E20 M20

Figure showing four wire speech and standard (double) E&M signalling.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 22(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.11 CPU-D_ (ROF 157 5118/_) and Connections on the CPU-D_

AUX_(ROF157 5119/_) For connection of the TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT,
see INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-RPM 603
Before installing the board mount the system software 339).
PROMs in the appropriate positions.

A C
Audio 18

ROF1575118
BS2 9727
CPU-D
R1A
Factory test
Audio 20
-48 VDC
red ALARM 22
yellow (out) ALARM Polarity
independent
green 0V 24 ALARM input
External 26
sensor 1 External
sensor 3
0V 28
0V
External
sensor 2 30
Not used
0V 32
Not used

TXD 10 RTS
only this V.24
0V 12 DTR port is active
RXD on the AUX3
14 DCD
board
DSR 16 CTS
red TXD 18 RTS
Cold 0V
start 20 DTR
strap RXD 22 DCD

DSR 24 CTS
TXD 26 RTS
0V 28 DTR

RXD 30 DCD

DSR 32 CTS

The ALARM input is optically isolated and the voltage

has to be between 20 - 60 VDC.
The ALARM output is equipped with an open collector
transistor with a capacity of 20 mA at 12 VDC
(Maximum 14 VDC).
A B
Use the following prefabricated cables to connect the
A Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x9/ xx peripheral data equipment to CPU-D_ and AUX_:
B Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x8/ xx • PC is TSR 902 0448/1

r additional CIL storage capacity up to two additional • printer is TSR 902 0476/1
battery backup RAMs can be added. • modem is TSR 902 0466/1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 23(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.12 CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) Connections on the CPU-D4

With the software key (FECU) KDU BS 130 07/_ new
functionalities can be accessed.
RYS 102 533/1
RYS 102 533/2

red
FW PROMS yellow
green

alarm relay
B18
B22
B20
ABC

Audio 18

ROF1575130
BS2 9727
CPU
R1A
Factory test
Audio 20
-48 VDC
red ALARM 22
yellow (out) ALARM (in)
green 0V 24 0V
External 26
Temp1 External
FECU Temp3
connector 0V 28
0V
External
Temp2 30
RTC

Not used
0V 32
Not used

TXD 10 RTS
2nd Battery RAM

0V 12 DTR
1st Battery RAM

RXD 14 DCD
C B A
DSR 16 CTS
red TXD + 18 RTS
Transmit
Coldstart 0V - 20 DTR RS 485
loop

Battery RAM strap

SW PROMS RXD + 22 DCD
KDY BS 101 02/1 Receive
DSR - RS 485
24 CTS
A R9 "RYS 102 191/ x" A R11 "RYS 102 214/ x" TXD 26 RTS
B R9 "RYS 102 192/ x" B R11 "RYS 102 215/ x"
0V 28 DTR
C R9 "RYS 102 193/ x" C R11 "RYS 102 216/ x"
RXD 30 DCD
A R10 "RYS 102 204/ x"
DSR 32 CTS
B R10 "RYS 102 205/ x"
C R10 "RYS 102 206/ x"
Similar to the previous versions, this board provides
the V.24 interfaces but additionally an RS-485 interface
To put the board in operation mount the system soft- for longer ranges. To connect the RS-485 data inter-
ware PROMs in the appropriate positions. The number face, use plug RNV 321 01 02. Be sure to loop RTS
of battery RAMs mounted on the CPU-D4 board de- with CTS otherwise data is lost if printer is OFF. The
pends on the functionality required. range of the interface is up to 1200m.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 24(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

It is possible to use a variety of converters. However 6.13 ELU-A and ELU-D

with the following converters: IC-485SI of ARP DATA-
CON and 232<->485/422 Converter Plus IC-109AE of The relevant boards are:
Black Box Corp. tests have been successful.
• ELU-D (ROF 157 5116/_)
• ELU-A (ROF 157 5114/1)
6.12.1 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU)
• ELU-A2 (ROF 157 5114/2)
Connecting this plug activates the appropriate applica- • ELU-D3 (ROF 157 5130/_)
tions and features as ordered depending on the FECU
index number. If no plug is connected, only a limited
Version 4.0 system functionality is available. The indi-

RYS 102 532/2

RYS 102 532/1

ces 2 to 10 always include the Basic Version 4 func-
tionality (index 1).
For detailed information of the features enabled by the

4
different FECUs refer to 15534-ASB 150 02 Uen
This switch is mount-
FACILITY DESCRIPTION GENERAL.

3
ed for future use

2
ON
FECU number Functionality Version 4.0

1
KDU BS 130 07/1 Basic Version 4.0 functionality
KDU BS 130 07/2 + std. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/3 + std. digital networking
KDU BS 130 07/4 + full. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/5 + full. digital networking
KDU BS 130 07/6 + full. digital networking, 4
interfaces and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/7 + std. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/8 + std. digital networking and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/9 + CTI + full. digital networking for
max. 32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/10 + CTI + full. digital networking for
unlimited number of interfaces

View of the ELU-D3 board

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 25(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Connection field 6 at front of ELU-D(3) and ELU-A

(LA16) LA0 A C
02 LA1 (LA17)
(LB16) LB0
04 LB1 (LB17)
(LA18) LA2
06 LA3 (LA19)
(LB18) LB2
08 LB3 (LB19)
10 LA3 (LA21)
(LA20) LA4
12 LB5 (LB21)
(LB20) LB4
(LA22) LA6 14 LA7 (LA23)
(LB22) LB6 Extension Line
16 LB7 (LB23)
connector to
18 LA9 (LA25) terminal
(LA24) LA8
LB9 (LB25) equipment
(LB24) LB8
20
22 LA11 (LA27)
(LA26) LA10
(LB26) LB10 LB11 (LB27)
24
(LA28) LA12
26 LA13 (LA29)

28 LB13 (LB29)
(LB28) LB12
30 LA15 (LA31)
(LA30) LA14
(LB30) LB14
32 LB15 (LB31)

The connections in field 4 are in brackets (only on

ELU-D3 for individuals 16 to 31)

On the first ELU-D_ board in the system the first three

extension positions should be used to connect the
OPERATOR telephones.
On sub-equipped ELU-A and ELU-D_ boards the con-
nection for extensions 8...15 (32) are not mounted.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 26(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.14 MFU (ROF 157 5132/_)

Board disconnected red

VMU,ELU-A/D Line blocked yellow RYS102 538/2
Line busy green
RYS102 538/1

COMPACT
FLASH S41 is for S42 refer to next page
CARD
future use
ROF1575128/1
only!
BS2 9627
IC-CU
R1A

41
trunks&REG yellow

ON

ON
ELU- ext. green
42
A C
LA0 18 LA1
168
ON

LB0 20 LB1
Analogue
extension LA2 22 LA3 S168/2 ON: ground key detection
PORT disabled
LB2 24 LB3
S168/1 ON: increased current
LA0 02 LA1 feeding on the analogue
extension port 0.(45 mA)
LB0 04 LB1

LA2 06 LA3
Digital LB2 08 LB3 155
extension 154
LA4 10 LA5
ON

PORT
ON

LB4 12 LB5 156 157

ON

ON

LA6 14 LA7

LB6 16 LB7 The switches 154 to 157 control the S- and

T0A 18 R0A T-interface termination and S-interface
T0B power feeding on the links 0...3.
20 R0B

T1A 22 R1A Connects power feeding ground

3 4

ISDN - T1B 24 R1B Connects -40V for power feeding

PORT Connects 100 Ω receive side termination
1 2

T2A 26 R2A
Connects 100 Ω send side termination
ON

S/T-Interface for
T2B 28 R2B
connecting trunks
and S-terminals T3A 30 R3A The DIP-switch is shown with
four contacts in OFF position
T3B 32 R3B (factory setting)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 27(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

The ISDN PART The VMU PART

DIP-switches position 154 to 157 The VMU functionality and the (4) registers are availa-
ble if the Compact Flash Card is inserted.
Switch 1 selects the termination on the send side.
Switch 2 selects the termination on the receiver side. For installation and configuration refer to the stipula-
Switches 3 and 4 enable remote power feeding to the tions in document START OF OPERATION (1537-
connected ISDN terminals. Switches 1...4 should be ASB150 02Uen) .
set to ON if the link is set as S-interface .
Note: The VMU will not start up without the internal
Note: At the end of each line a termination resistor directories created on the Compact Flash Card.
must be installed (e.g. in the last wall outlet). The unlock key (file named DISK.ULK) must be
valid on the compact flash card.
Switch position 42
The MFU board can use only flash cards supplied by
When selecting S- or T-interfaces start by setting the T-
ERICSSON. These flash cards are delivered with a
interfaces using switches 4, 3, 2 and 1 in consecutive
control file called DISK.ULK containing a licence key.
order then set the S-interfaces starting with switches 1,
This file must not be opened by any tool as this would
2, 3 and 4.
destroy the file and thus disable the compact flash
card. This will cause an error condition indicated by
Q/T-interface Link: slow flashing yellow and green extension LEDs.
0 Limitations:
3 4

OFF... Q/T-Interface 1
ON ...S-Interface Only four MFU boards may be mounted per cabinet.
2
1 2

MFU board(s) can be mixed with VMU-HD board(s)

ON

3
but if a MFU board is installed, no VMU-D board may
S-interface be installed in the system.
If a MFU board is installed without compact flash card,
On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF
the complete VMU part is marked inactive. If later on
Settings and ranges on the T-/S-interface the MFU will be upgraded with a compact flash card,
then this can not be done by using the Hot swapping
Refer to section 6.8 on page 14 feature, due to different card types. The MFU without
flash card has to be removed completely from the sys-
tem (from HW and SW point of view ) and then the
MFU with flash card can be included in the system.
The prevoius programming of the card, has to be done
again.

The ELU-D3 PART

The DBC 213 and DBC 214 instruments are not
supported with 4 key panels, only 2 key panels per
instrument are allowed to be connected.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 28(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

6.15 VMU-HD (ROF 157 5126/1)

990/1 990/2 FUNCTION
(ROF 157 5126/3) w. Flash Card
ON or
OFF 16 channels, no register function
OFF
For installation unpack the VMU-HD board with the
OFF 8 channels with MFC detection
mounted hard disk. The Flash disks are available with and DTMF / Tone receiver
a capacity of 60 MB. Remove the transport protection ON
8 channels with MFE detection
for the hard disk and keep it in case of re-shipment e.g. ON and DTMF / Tone receiver
factory repair. Install and configure the VMU-HD in the
cabinet according to the stipulations in 1537- Structure of directories on hard disk or flash card
ASB15002Uen START OF OPERATION. \Info0 \message2 \anno0
Note: The VMU-HD will not start up without internal \Info1 \message3 \anno1
directories created on the hard disk. \message4 \anno2
\message5 \anno3
The DIP-switch is shown with
both contacts in OFF position \annoF
(factory setting)
Removal of hard disk or flash card
ON
To remove the hard disk, take out the board from the
system. Disengage the hard disk with lever A and pull
1 2 out the hard disk.

6.16 VMU-D (ROF 157 5117/1)

990
The VMU-D has no switches, but is equipped with a
back up battery, RNV 991 942/001 to prevent loss of
data in case of power failure. Install the battery to con-
nection field 4, before the exchange is started. For safe
operation, replace this battery periodically every five
years in accordance with document MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION (1541-ASB 150 02 Uen).

Installation of battery back-up on VMU-D

PCMCIA Hard/
Flash disk
type III and II

A
Press button
Press buttontotodisengage
disengage
the the hard
PCM-CIA
A card and remove it.
disk and take it out.
DIP switch on VMU-HD
DIP switch 990 selects whether register function is en-
Connection
abled or not.
field 4
Battery RNV 991 942/001
Limitations:
Only one VMU-HD can be mounted per cabinet and
just one type either VMU-HD or VMU-D can be in-
stalled in a system.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 29(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7 INTEGRATED CORDLESS
The Integrated Cordless (IC) is a digital cordless telephone solution complying to the DECT standard providing wire-
less connection for up to 108 portables with the A-protocol and 210 portables in GAP-protocol applications. Several
components comprise a complete system.
After the system has been physically installed use RASC and the Cordless System Manager (CSM) for initialization,
maintenance, updating, fault finding and when possible to recover the PBX from errors. The CSM can be ordered
under LZYNB 201 01 R6A or higher for the A-protocol and LZYNB 201 05 R1B or higher for GAP-applications.

7.1 Board Descriptions

7.1.1 IC-Control Unit2 (IC-CU2)

The IC-CU2 is the control board supporting the DECT GAP-protocol. The IC-CU2 includes 8 voice channel units and
is equipped with 4 BSs interfaces.
The wiring distance with remote power feeding to the BSs using only the serial communication wires SC0 and SC1 is
limited to 400m. For line lengths up to 900m additional Express Power feeding Pairs (EPP) need to be wired. The
maximum wire length between BS (fed locally) and IC-CU2 is only data limited and may reach up to 900 meters.
The board offers the following connections:
• the Cordless System Manager (on a PC)
• a printer to log errors
• 4 Base Stations
• the Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU).

7.1.2 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU)

This plug determines which maximum number of portables are allowed to be connected to the system. This plug is
available for various numbers of cordless telephones. For up to 8 portables no plug is required.

FECU number Number of Portables

KDU 130 05/1 16
KDU 130 05/2 24

7.2 Traffic capacity

The IC-CU2’s traffic capacity is limited by its 8 speech transcoders. Each Base Station has a capacity of 8 simultane-
ous calls. The Grade Of Service is the probability that a call is rejected because of system congestion. The customer
has to indicate which Grade Of Service is acceptable to her/him. A Grade Of Service of 1%, or 0.01 means an aver-
age of 1 lost call in every 100 calls.
The GOS, the 8 speech circuits and the total amount of traffic (Erlang) that is required in the system are related to
each other as shown in the table below. (The Erlang value at a required GOS)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 30(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

IC-CU2 Speech Grade of service (GOS)

circuits 2% 1% 0.5% 0.1%
1 8 3.6 Erl. 3.2 Erl. 2.7 Erl. 2.1Erl.

For the calculation it is necessary to estimate the time the portables actually make calls. The table below shows the
Erlang value depending on the estimated mean call-minutes for a portable telephone. These values may be differ be-
tween departments depending on their activities. These values multiplied by the number of portables result in a traffic
capacity that has to be provided.

Minutes mErlang Minutes mErlang Minutes mErlang Minutes mErlang

per hour per hour per hour per hour
3 50 9 150 15 250 30 500
6 100 12 200 18 300 45 750

Example:
A customer orders a system with 24 portable telephones and estimates that each portable generates 150 mE in av-
erage (that is 9 minutes off-hook time per portable per hour). With an accepted GOS of 2.0% the system has a traf-
fic capacity of 3,6 Erl. (0,15x24=3,6).

7.2.1 Traffic Capacity of Base Stations

A Base Station with 8 channels available has an Erlang value of 2.7 with a GOS of 0.5%. This means that each Base
Station can serve 18 portables, assuming that each portable generates 150 mE during busy hour or 13.5 portables
generating 200 mE each.
Example: Assuming a full coverage in a building can be achieved with 2 Base Stations which means that 20 portables
generate together 20 x 0.150 = 3 E. Every Base Station has a traffic capacity of 2.7 Erlang. To offer sufficient cover-
age two Base Stations covering the busiest area of the company are needed.
Generally the total capacity offered by the cordless network is more than sufficient. However in certain places, traffic
demands may vary to such extent that the network is often blocked locally, or has a lower GOS than required. For in-
stance a purchase department may easily generate 300 mE per Portable during busy hour, thus, when e.g. with a
number persons giving a very high load on the Base Station close by. It may be necessary to add a Base Station in
this area to have enough capacity for others to call as well. Also think of e.g. canteens during lunch time etc.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 31(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7.3 IC-CU2 (ROF 157 5131/_) (GAP-Protocol)

LEDs

RP error red Switch 1 and 2 must have the ON

Individual blocked yellow same position. ON (default)
Individual busy green 48V from the backplane. OFF
CPU error/DCT error log green activates external DC input and
SPU error red 1 2
disconnects the backplane.
CLU error red
DECT Sync port
RYS 102 531/1
SYNCH A IN
RYS 102 531/2
ON

SYNCH B IN

synchronization
DECT
SYNCH A OUT 0V
ROF1575131/1
BS2 9727
IC-CU2
R1A

SYNCH B OUT 0V

RYS 102 554/1

(KDU 130 05/__)
V0(-)
External power input
via front connector (to enable V1(+)
set switch 1and 2 to OFF) RYSNB 101 20

to power supply BML 351 048 TSR BS 101 12/1500

Express Power feeding to base stations

A C RYSNB 101 19
+

To BS 4 EPP(-) 18 EPP(+)
20
22
To BS 3 EPP(-) EPP(+) RYS 102 553/1

24
To BS 2 EPP(-) 26 EPP(+) RYSNB 101 23/2 remove paper
insulation
28
30 Maintenance port
To BS 1 EPP(-) EPP(+)
TXM 18 RTS
32
0V 20 DTR
Serial communication to base stations PRINTER
A C RCV 22 DCD PORT
02
To BS 4 SC0 SC1 n.c. 24 CTS
04 TXM 26 RTS
06 0V
To BS 3 SC0 SC1 28 DTR
08 MAINTENANCE
RCV 30 DCD PORT
10
To BS 2 SC0 SC1 DSR
12 32 CTS

14
To BS 1 SC0 SC1
16
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 32(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7.4 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_ and KRCNB 301 03/_)

The Base Station (BS) enables radio communication between the Integrated Cordless system and the portable
telephones. The communication via two 2B+D interfaces requires two twisted pair cables. Both interfaces provide in
total eight 32 kbit/s speech paths between a BS and IC-CU2, enabling a BS to handle eight simultaneous calls. The
BS is connected to the IC-CU2 via two wire pairs called serial communication wires (SC0 & SC1) carrying up to 8
simultaneous digital voice connections and the central power feeding. Apart from data communication these two twisted
pairs are also used to distribute power to the BSs. Two additional pairs can be wired to provide a greater powering
range. There are three methods to power BSs:
1. centrally via backplane (with or without EPP)
2. centrally via external input (with / w.o EPP)
3. via local power supply (optional).
With the first and second methods power is distributed via the IC-CU2 to the BS. The cable length between BS and
IC-CU2 depends on the number of wires used for power feeding, the type of cable and environmental noise. In the
third case (local feeding), BSs are powered by an AC-adapter or another power source which is not routed via the
cabinet.
The number of BSs used in a system depends on the area to be covered and the traffic density. Typical in-house
coverage is a radius of up to 30 meters. In practice the cell size may vary between 10 meters indoors in worst case
situations, up to 300 meters outdoor in free space.
The BS has two main functions:
• to modulate a carrier with the digital encoded information (TDMA frame directed to portable)
• to demodulate a modulated carrier (TDMA frame received from portable).
A special cover (KRY NB 101 01) is available to mount the BS (KRCNB 201 03) outdoors providing splash proof
housing and water tight sealings for the wiring.

7.4.1 Base Station Planning

The major task when providing a wireless service is to estimate the number of BSs and to find their most suitable
location. A number of factors tend to limit the range of a BS like the materials the wall is composed of or the location
and size of machines, furniture, air-conditioning systems, elevators etc. This results in unexpected reflections or
absorption of radio waves. Generally BSs should not be located on outer walls, except if the outdoor area has to be
covered as well, as this reduces the area actually covered. All of these unpredictable influencing factors make it
extremely difficult to define rules for how to cover an area with a suitable number of BSs. In difficult environments the
use of a site survey tool (LTT NB 101 01/_) is recommended.
Establish a Base Station plan for the installation site to determine the best location for the BSs.
Base Station aerial range
• In an office environment located in a steel concrete building up to 30 m in diameter can be covered,
including, in normal conditions, the neighbouring floors as well.
• Production halls up to 200 m in diameter are covered but ranges can be smaller if bulky machines, cranes
etc. are part of the interior.
• Outdoor ranges can be up to 300m.
When installing a BS, position it, then walk around to determine cell coverage area either by listening to the speech
quality - whether mutes or crackling sounds are heard in the portable - or measure the RQI indicator using the portables
Service Display facility (see FAULT TRACING 1545-ASB15002Uen).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 33(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

16m

Ground floor corridor

intermediate
floor

Base
Station 1
3,5m

e.g. 40m

7.4.2 Base Stations Cabling

Using a four-pair cable or more-pair cable, the free cable pairs can be used as additional power wires (EPP) to increase
the feeding distance and reduce overall power consumption (by reducing the ohmic resistance) to the BS. The BS can
also be powered by an on-site adapter (refer to section 7.4.7).
Connection of serial communication wires and EPP lines is polarity-independent. SC0-0 and SC0-1 may be
interchanged but SC0-x and SC1-x may not be interchanged. The diagram below shows the wiring principle to each
base station connected to the IC-CU2.
Power feeding of the Base Station
There are three alternatives to power feed (-48V) the Base Station:
• The power feeding can be taken via the IC-CU2 from the back plane in the cabinet. The DIP-switch on the
IC-CU2 is set to OFF.
• From an external power source via the front connector on the IC-CU2 (≤56V). Note the polarity on the
input (see drawing of IC-CU2 board). The switch on the IC-CU2 is set to ON.
• By an AC-adapter (see page 39). The switch on the IC-CU2 should be set to ON to cut off
power feeding via the front connector on the IC-CU2.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 34(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

SC0-a
-48V from V0- 48V external
source
backplane V1+ SC0-b
(optional)
S1 & 2 SC1-a
+ DC
Data/power
SC1-b
connector 1 DC
SC0-a -
EPPa
up to 2 power pairs "EPP
carrying V0- and V1+
CLC x +T EPPb
SC0-b
(one of 4 SC1-a
or 8)
+T SC0-a
SC1-b
EPPa SC0-b
Data/power
connector 2 SC1-a
EPPb
available only on
Base Station SC1-b
KRC NB 301 01/_
IC-CU2 EPPa
Base Station KRC NB 201 03/_
EPPb
and KRC NB 301 01/_

7.4.3 Base station cable delay measurement

After all base stations have been installed, the cable delays must be measured in order to program the base station
delays into the system at initialization time. On IC-CU2s with the revision R1C and higher automatic delay measurement
is performed. In this case no measurement is needed but using the cordless system manager (CSM) go to the menu
"add Base Station" and enter a "1" in the field "delay".

7.4.4 Ranges on cables

The following ranges are given for base stations connected to an IC-CU2. Depending on the cable type ranges depend
on noise levels imposed on the cables. The values stated are maximum achievable ranges:

Type Cable Maximum cable length

Wire diameter (∅) Capacitance Superimposed noise

8 mV/pHz 10 mV/pHz

Twisted pair 0.4 mm 45 nF/km 1.2 km 1.0 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 45 nF/km 1.6 km 1.4 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 120 nF/km 0.9 km 0.8 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 45 nF/km 1.9 km 1.7 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.1 km 1.0 km

Double-twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.0 km 0.9 km

(J-Y (St)Y 2×2×0.6)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 35(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7.4.5 Base Station (KRC NB 203 01/_)

The Base Station (BS) is supplied with a drilling template to mount the unit and 2 antennas with TNC connectors.
Mount the unit in a suitable location to provide the best communication coverage.
Use the supplied drilling template and mount the BS with four screws (6 mm Φ). Complete the electrical connection
according to the above drawing. Do not connect to the Base station yet.
IF power is supplied by the adapter (BMLNB 101 04), the screw/slide connector must be used. The serial
communication wires can be connected via the modular jack or the screw/slide connector. A screw with a bundling
cord holder is provided for traction relief to the left of the connection field.The BS starts up if the supply lines deliver
more than 12 VDC.

LEDs

Status of LEDs Meaning

Power LED on (green) BS power on
Reset LED on (red) Power Fail/Reset
TNC connector
LED1 and LED2 on or BS in non
LED1 and LED2 flashing operational mode
Mounting
holes (4x) LED1 and LED2 off BS operational (no traffic)
LED1 off and LED2 on BS operational (traffic)
LED1 on and LED2 off Fatal software error
LED 2
Power

LED 1
Reset

X52 X51
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
or screw/slide
modular jack connector
EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)

EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

Use connectors 5 & 6 for AC adapter

nc
nc

nc
nc

connection. This input is insensitive to

polarity reversal

Note: ) If the Base Station (KRC NB 201 03/_) is accessible by persons other than trained personnel mount the cover
(SDFNB 101101/_ or similar.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 36(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7.4.6 Base Station (KRCNB 301 03/_)

LED2

Front view Rear view

8 pin
LED1 modular plug
EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b
nc
nc

SC = Serial Channel
EPP = Express Power Pair Factory testing Data/power Data/power
6 pin modular plug
NC = Not connected
The BS is connected to the radio exchange by means of a standard twisted pair cable. The BS is can be fixed to a
wall, a ceiling, a pole or a beam, by means of the mounting bracket included. When fixing the BS to a wall or ceiling
the included plugs and screws must be used. When fixing it to a pole or beam a (not included) strap or a flexible metal
band must be used.
Connectors
• Two 8-pin modular jacks for data and powering
• A 6-pin modular jack for factory testing
The two data/powering connectors are interconnected on the board.
LEDs
LED 1: Green power LED
LED 2: Three colour LED, see table below

Status of LED2 Meaning

Off Base station operational and no traffic on the base station
Green Base station operational and traffic on the base station
Red Base station is malfunctioning
Amber Base station is OK, but not available (self-test, not initialized,
no communication with radio exchange)
Flashing green All 8 channels are in use
Flashing amber Software is being downloaded to the base station
The BSs can be mounted vertically or horizontally. Mount the BSs at places and positions as determined in the system
configuration plan. The BS must be placed so that it is not facing large metal objects such as large heating pipes,
machines.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 37(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Fixing the mounting bracket to a wall

Fix the mounting bracket (see figure below) to the wall as follows:
1. Hold the mounting bracket with its flat side against the wall such that the text ‘TOP’ is the right way up,
and mark the two holes. The minimum distance between the upper hole and the ceiling or any object
above the BS must be as least 65 mm. If the distance is less than 65 mm, the BS cannot be slid onto
the bracket.
2. When using wall plugs, take a ∅ 6 mm drill and drill the two holes and insert the included wall plugs.
3. Position the mounting bracket with its flat side to the wall and fasten it with the two included ∅ 3.5 mm
screws.

Ceiling

≥ 65 mm

TOP

Fixing the mounting bracket to a pole or beam

The mounting bracket can be attached to a pole (diameter ≥ 45 mm) or a beam (wider than 50 mm) by means of a
strap or flexible metal band less than 30 mm wide. Position the mounting bracket to a pole or a beam so that the text
‘TOP’ is right way up. The strap or flexible metal band must be purchased locally.

Tied wrongly

Cable ducts
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 38(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

When the BS is mounted to the wall, cable ducts can

be used to route the wiring through.
• Fix the cable duct to the wall in one of the
positions shown in the left figure.
65 mm
• For safety reasons secure the BS cable to a
57 mm
TOP convenient point at about 30 cm from the base
station.
If for some reason the BS drops, the cable is pulled
out of the base station.

125 mm

15 mm thick cable ducts

75 mm 70 mm

Mounting the Base Station

1. Hold the BS flat against the mounting bracket and move it downwards until it clicks.

Note: After completion of the installation, base stations must be initialized using the cordless system manager.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 39(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

7.4.7 Power Feeding of Base Stations

When using any of the adapters mentioned below care must be taken to configure the IC-CU2 boards for local BS
feeding. If the BSs are to be fed locally the remote power feeding switch on the boards should be set to the position
disconnecting the feeding from the back plane and no external feeding to the board should be connected.
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_)
An AC-adapter to feed the BS locally is available for 230VAC/24VDC (BMLNB 101 04) for all European countries ex-
cept for the UK and Cyprus. In other countries it has to be purchased locally and must meet the specifications given
below:
Output voltage: between 12 V and 56VDC
Output power 7.5W minimum
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 301 03/_)
The 24 VDC adapter (BMLNB 101 09/n) is fitted with a 8-pin modular plug that can be plugged into one of the data/
power connectors of the base station.

7.4.8 Software upgrade

If necessary, the software in the BS can be updated by downloading new software to the BS. Downloading can be
performed without disconnecting the BS. The new software is stored in flash memory.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 40(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

8 LINE NETWORK
The line network for PBX-extensions is to be installed in accordance with the stipulations for standard telephone
networks. Twisted pair cables must be used for the lines and a wire diameter of 0.5 mm is recommended in order to
reach full line length, i.e. 800 m.
No stubs and/or branches may exist on digital extension lines, as they could cause transmission problems.
• In case a separate Ericsson MDF has to be installed, prefabricated cables are used between the MDF and
board connectors in the exchange cabinet. These cables have EURO-connectors mounted at one end for
connection to the board.
For connection of ELU-A, ELU-D, ELU-D3, MFU, BTU-A, BTU-C or BTU-E to the MDF use the following cable:
• TSR BS 902 0001/800 is terminated on the board side with standard Ericsson connectors and Krone
connectors on the other side.
• TSR 902 0472/3 (length = 6 m) is equipped with a connector only at the exchange side
• TSR 901 0472/2 (length = 15 m) is equipped with a connector only at the exchange side
For connection of BTU-D, use the following cable:
• TSR 225 1304/20000, 75 Ω coaxial cable
• or use the same cable as for BTU-A for 120 Ω connection or a double shielded cable TSR 901 0481/20000
(adhere to local requirements).
The cables run into the exchange from below the cabinet. The cables from the line network are led directly to the
MDF in the exchange cabinet. Secure the cables to the exchange cabinet with the adhesive anchors and tie wraps.
Place the cables according to the figure.
NOTE: There must be a connection to earth for the MDF cabinet when surge protectors are installed.

Cables from
line network Alternative
connections
of cables to
board

Primarily intended
for trunkline use
(with surge protectors)
Alternative
connections
of cables from
line network
Cable for board
connection
Earth
connection
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 41(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

8.1 Cables for BDV 101 05

8.1.1 MDF cables

Krone

R-state
Factory Year-W-D

C
A B

a02 a10
colour: wt bl wt or wt gn wt br rd bl rd or rd gn rd br
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 5 ind. 6
(bl) b (or) b (bl) b (or) b
A B a b a b a b a b a b a b a
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a 1 2 3 4 5 6
ind. 3 ind. 4 ind. 7 ind. 8
(gn) b (br) b (gn) b (br) b
ind.1 ind.2 etc. slotting side
wire wrap side

ERICSSON MDF bar

C
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

C
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
A B
connections see above
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 8
Open ends
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

A B
connections see above
length a

part number a usage Cable with 8 pairs, mounted with:

TSR BS 902 0001
/1500 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF ERICSSON plug and Krone bar
/3000 3000 mm MDF cable for existing MDF
TSR 902 0444/1 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF ERICSSON plug
and ERICSSON MDF distribution bar
TSR 902 0444/2 3000 mm standard cable for external MDF ERICSSON plug
TSR 901 0472/3 6000 mm for external MDF, 120Ω for BTU-D and open ends
TSR 901 0472/2 15000 mm standard cable for external MDF
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 42(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

8.1.2 Coax cable for BTU-D

B
length a

part number a usage

TSR 225 1304/20000 20000mm coax cable 75 Ω for BTU-D

8.1.3 V.24 cables

only on TSR 902 0466

13 1

25 14

C
A
B
length a

TXD A02 TXD 2

A02 C02 A02 3
0V
A04 0V 7 A04 7
RTS C02 RTS 4
C02 5
A04 C04 DTR
A C04 DTR 6 C04 20

A06 C06 C A06 RXD 2

C A06 RXD 3
CTS C08 CTS 5
C08 4
C06 DCD 8
c06
A08 C08 A08 DSR 20 A08 DSR 6

Wiring of cables: TSR 902 0476 Wiring of cable: TSR 902 0466
TSR 902 0448

part number a usage

TSR 902 0448/1 5000mm cable connecting a PC to CPU-D_/AUX

TSR 902 0466/1 5000mm cable connecting a modem to CPU-D_/AUX
TSR 902 0476/1 5000mm cable connecting a printer to CPU-D_/AUX
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 43(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

8.1.4 Battery connection cable

Factory Year-W-D
R-state
length a

part number a usage

part of NTM BS 101 28 3000mm Battery connection cable

8.1.5 Mains power cables

Cable for EUROPE

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 323 2500mm mains power cable 230V 10A

Cable for U.K.

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 326 2500mm mains power cable 250V 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 44(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Cable for Brazil, Mexico, Venezuela etc.

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 324 2500mm mains power cable 125V 10A

Cable for Australia, New Zealand, China etc.

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 311 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Denmark

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 327 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 45(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

Cable for India and South Africa

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 325 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Italy

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 313 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Switzerland

length a

part number a usage

RPM 945 322 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 46(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

9 MARKING OF CABLES 9.1 External MDF SXK 106 4139/1

Each cable that is connected to a PBX type ASB 150 Unpack the MDF cabinet and remove its front cover.
should be marked on the cable’s designation holder Mount the MDF cabinet on its designated position.
with the label set SVH 277 003/4, supplied for this Take into consideration the normal working height
purpose. The cable TSR 902 0444/1 is supplied with a above the floor (about 1.30 m to the lower edge of the
designation holder, 860 1839, at the EURO-connector. MDF cabinet) and the length (1.5 m) of prefabricated
cable
TSR 902 0444/1.
Label 2: Overall dimensions
BTU_

Placing of PBA
03

in PBX of the MDF cabinet: 295x184x68 (HxWxD in mm).

01 2 34
2
Label 1:
6* 2

Type of PBA
Mounting of MDF cabinet
Label 3: 147 mm
Position of pin
contact unit
on PBA
4
1st
1/4
Front side of
designation 2nd
holder on cable 1/4
to PBA 3rd
1/4
6
4th
1/4

228 mm
This label set contains three label types:
Label 1: This label indicates the abbreviated name
for the PBA to which the cable is to be
connected.
Example of parameter: BTU_

Label 2: There is one 2-digit parameter.

This parameter indicates the position of
the PBA-slot in the PBA where the cable
is to be connected.
Example of parameter: 03
1 Loosen cover only by hand force
Label 3 There are two 1-digit parameters. (there are no holding screws)
The first parameter indicates the position
of the pin-contact unit on the PBA. 2 Mark mounting holes for MDF cabinet
The second parameter indicates the 1/4
3 Drill and insert plugs
of the pin contact. (Use enclosed screws and plugs)
Example of parameters: 6* 2
4 Mount MDF cabinet and screw it
These three labels indicate where the upper part of the securely into position
cable is to be connected and are placed on the front
side of the designation holder.
When the label 1 for PBA has a "_" included in the
name, please enter the correct letter with a marker
pen.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 47(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

10 Door Interface Unit (DIU) sounds loud and clear enough other wise repeat the
procedure.
(BFY BS 10101/1)
• No voice connection to the speaker of the
Installation: telephone.Turn the mic potentiometer screw two
turns clock wise. Speak into the door phone
The DIU is an interface connected via one or two ex- microphone and verify that it is heard in the hand set
tension lines to the ELU-A of the exchange and via a of the telephone otherwise repeat again.
set of wires to the door phone. The DIU should be
mounted indoors on a dry wall. The door phone can be Settings on the board
of any commercially available type as long as it meets
the requirements listed in the 1555-ASB15002Uen OPENER
SYSTEM OVERVIEW under section 7 Technical Data 8 sec
6 sec Ext. B x17
for DIU. K1
4 sec
1 sec TO
D TIMEOUT Extension
Connection: 3 min B (door
2 min opener)
use cable diameter ≥0.6mm 1 min

The wires to the speaker and microphone should be (lead directly to door opener C
button if already wired)
led via two twisted pairs in a separate cable. Caution
x12 DO TO
when connecting a polarity-dependant microphone. Extension
Check polarity on connector x1. Make the connections A (voice)
Ext. A x18
to the door bell button, door opener and key lights etc DIU (BFY BS 101 01)
in another cable. This is to minimise disturbances on Microphone sensitivity
the microphone line. The wires to the door opener level setting

carry more current and should have a diameter greater Mic

A B
than 0.6 mm. The length between door phone and DIU
Loudspeaker
should be less than 50 m. The length between door LS MIC
+ - - Volume BELL
phone and exchange should be less than 500m. x2 x1 x5
+
The connector X18 is used for speech connection be-
tween DIU and exchange. The connector X17 is used
to activate the door opener. If the door opener wiring
already exists the X17 connection can be omitted and spkr mic
the connection X12 leads to an existing button. door
door phone bell button
Pressing the door phone button (connection X5) acti-
vates the DIU and the programmed extension rings door
(see Facility Description 15534-ASB15002Uen). The opener
interface stays active for the preset time selected un- mains 8...48VAC
der "C" and shuts off after this time has elapsed.
Transformer

10.0.1 Adjustments of DIU Microphone connection with polarity dependent

A
6 VDC supply for microphones with amplifiers.
The microphone level is factory set, but under certain
conditions the line attenuation can exceed expectations B The loudspeaker volume level is factory set. To
adjust turn the Loudspeaker potentiometer.
resulting only in one way speech connection or clipping
of the voice between extension and door phone. In this C Timeout for the interface to shut off. The jumper se-
case cautious change of microphone level setting has lects intervals between 1...2...3 minutes.
to be performed. The potentiometers range is D Set door opener activation time 1...4...6...8 sec.
• If the voice in the speaker of the door phone sounds
too dim or is clipped, turn the mic potentiometer
screw two turns counter clockwise. Speak into the
telephone microphone and verify that the speaker
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 48(48)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev Reference
1999-07-15 A

11 INSTALLATION OF ALARM INTERFACE UNIT

Line to exchange
a

DBY BS 410 01/1

nc ba a b bb nc

line to exchange

ba and bb are the

connectors to the
alarm button
nc are not used wires

wall outlet
a RPM BS 130 002/01
connect to the line input on the telephone

Line/Alarm (to wall outlet) Line out (to telephone) Optional Alarm

1 1 1
6-pin 4-pin 4-pin
modular jack modular jack modular jack
Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 not used 1 not used 1 button a
2 button a 2 a 2 not used
3 a 3 b 3 not used
4 b 4 not used 4 button b
5 button b
6 not used

The ALARM INTERFACE UNIT is an optional equipment mounted in the case bottom of the DBC 21x telephones.
This equipment is used in the hospitality area to enable distress notification from e.g. a bathroom. A normally closed
switch is installed and the two terminals are connected to the pins (button a and button b) on the option unit. The con-
nection can be made in the wall outlet. Then the wiring shown above applies. If another type of wiring is used the
connector Optional alarm can be used.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
SEA/EBBMP Stangelberger SEA/EBBX/F 1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
SEA/EBBMP 1999-07-15 V ASB 150 02
Database reference
1531_250.fm

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION

ORDLESS
EXCHANGE CABINET

BDV 113 08

Update pages for field trials R9

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Contents Page 5.17 VMU-D (ROF 157 5117/1) . . . . . . . 31

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6 INTEGRATED CORDLESS. . . . . . 32

1.1 Supplementary Documents . . . . . . . 3 6.1 Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.2 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6.2 Traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY. 4 6.3 Board IC-CU (ROF 157 5128) (A-Protocol)

35
3 UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6.4 IC-CU2 (ROF 157 5131/_) (GAP-Protocol)
4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 36
4.1 PBX with one cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.5 Board IC-LU (ROF 157 5129) . . . . 37
4.2 PBX with more than one cabinet . . . 7 6.6 Board IC-LU (ROF 157 5129) . . . . 38
4.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.7 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_ and
4.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 KRCNB 301 03/_) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4.5 Backplane (ROA 119 5132) PUB 6. 10 7 LINE NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4.6 Power supervision on ELU-A . . . . . 11 7.1 Cables for BDV 113 08 . . . . . . . . . 47

4.7 System Power Consumption. . . . . . 11 8 MARKING OF CABLES . . . . . . . . 53

5 BOARD POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 13 9 INSTALLATION OF MDF

(Main Distribution Frame)53
5.1 Board position numbering. . . . . . . . 13
9.1 Integrated MDF SXK 106 4208/1. . 53
5.2 Placing of boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
9.2 External MDF SXK 106 4139/1 . . . 54
5.3 Connection of CM-boards. . . . . . . . 14
9.3 Line network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.4 BTU-A (ROF 157 5110/_) and
BTU-A2 (ROF 157 5120/_) . . . . . . . 15 10 INSTALLATION OF FILTER BOX
(BDV 113 31) WITH BE12/16,
5.5 Power failure circuit (PFC) . . . . . . . 15 CALL METERING FILTER BOARD
5.6 BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/_). . . . . . . . 16 (ROA 219 5110/1, -/2),
MOUNTED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.7 BTU-B (ROF 157 5121/_) . . . . . . . . 17
11 Door Interface Unit (DIU)
5.8 BTU-B2 (ROF 157 5121/_) . . . . . . . 17 (BFY BS 10101/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.9 BTU-D (ROF 157 5112/1) and 12 INSTALLATION OF ALARM
REG (ROF 157 5112/2) . . . . . . . . . 19 INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.10 BTU-E (ROF 157 5113/_) . . . . . . . . 21
5.11 CPU-D_ (ROF 157 5118/_) and
AUX_(ROF1575 119/_). . . . . . . . . . 25
5.12 CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) . . . . . . 26
5.13 ELU-C (ROF 157 5115/1) . . . . . . . . 27
5.14 ELU-A and ELU-D_ . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.15 MFU (ROF 157 5132/_) . . . . . . . . . 29
5.16 VMU-HD (ROF 157 5126/_) . . . . . . 31
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

1 GENERAL MDF
ASB
The exchange cabinet BDV 113 08 can be furnished 150 02
with Printed Board Assemblies (PBAs or boards) be-
longing to ERICSSON’s PBX-system ASB 150 02. The
desired system functions are made possible by means
of the appropriate boards and system programming.
The ASB 150 02 system can be expanded to a maxi-
mum of three exchange cabinets of type BDV 113 08. Protective Overvoltage arresters
resistors 10 Ω/1W (NGC 402 01)
The PBX can be powered either by a transformer unit, (REN 195 42/1) Housed in: Overvoltage
a switched mode power supply, installed in the back of
Protective protection cassette
the cabinet, or by an existing external 48 V DC-source. ground (769 027/3)
After installation the PBX shall be made operational in Note: Make sure the MDF is really connected
accordance with the stipulations that apply for system to protective ground.
ASB 150 02. See document START OF OPERATION
Figure: Line protection
(1537-ASB 150 02). The cabinet is adapted for boards
fitted with brackets containing screws. Only boards Note: The article numbers stated in this document are
equipped with these brackets must be installed. These included for information purpose only. For
screws must always be fastened to ensure a proper ordering please refer to the relevant system
ground connection. ORDERING INFORMATION
Every cabinet’s board position could be used for arbi- (131 62-1x/ASB150 02).
trary furnishing with boards belonging to PBX system
ASB 150 02 but the first position in the first cabinet
must be reserved for the CPU-D_. 1.1 Supplementary Documents
Any lines connected to the PBX that are subjected to
• Document collection EN/LZB 103 1233
excess voltage (transients) in conjunction with e.g.
lightning discharges must be equipped with excess
voltage protection, refer to figure: Line protection. The
excess voltage protection can not be installed inside a 1.2 Tools
BDV 113 08 cabinet but should be mounted in an inte-
grated or external MDF. In addition to customary installation tools, the following
are recommended:
Special precautions must be taken for analogue exten-
sion lines that are leading outdoors to prevent the ana- • Appropriate slotting tool for connecting cables to
logue extension board’s secondary protection devices external MDF. For MDF SXK 106 4139/1, use
from blowing in case of lightning. slotting tool LSY 138 252 and for the MDFs with
KRONE connectors, use slotting tool 769 027/2
In this case the extension line must have:
• Board extractor for PBAs (Handle LTD 117 02
1 A protective resistor of 10 Ω/1W and Bottom LTD 117 12)
(REN 195 42/1) connected in series
between cabinet and MDF
2 An overvoltage arrester (gas discharge
tube) for quenching surges to protective
ground should be installed on the network
side of the protective resistor
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

2 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

t .
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
th
r
fo
ank
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

t.
en
m
cu
do
e
th
ad
re
to
k
lin
e
th
se
U
t.
en
m
cu
do
E-
C
e
th
r
fo
ank
bl
ft
le
is
ge
pa
is
Th
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

3 UNPACKING 4 INSTALLATION
Unpack the exchange cabinet and remove its front The PBX cabinet with the power supply in the back is
cover. to be mounted on an indoor wall. A mains outlet must
be provided near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible. The premises shall comply with the
following prerequisites:
• The air shall be free of dust and smoke
• Environmental conditions according to Ak 8.
(Temperature shall be between + 5° C and
+ 40° C and relative humidity may vary between
15% and 80%)
4 • The PBX shall not be exposed to direct sunlight

3 • Cable shall preferably run into the PBX from

below the cabinet to ensure sufficient air flow
and space for the power supply is provided.

4.1 PBX with one cabinet

Mount the exchange cabinet in its designated position.

2 Take into consideration that the normal working height
above the floor is about 1.30 m of the lower edge of the
1 cabinet.

Overall dimensions of cabinet: 432 x 256 x 299

1 Loosen screws that secure cover (H x W x D in mm)

Break off 1 Mount bracket

2 Pull cover approx. 10 mm towards you and remove
188 mm (SXA 112 4406/3) on
3 Then remove cover by lifting it in direction of the wall. Use en-
arrow closed screws and
plugs
4 For delivery, transport protection is placed 2 Hang up cabinet
under the front cover.
This protection shall be removed 3 Mark the lower
retaining holes
390 mm

4 Take down cabinet,

Check that all ordered items have been received drill and insert plugs
according to the delivery note and nothing has been for lower retaining
damaged during the transport. holes
5 Mount cabinet and
secure
226 mm
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

4.2 PBX with more than one cabinet

A system comprising more than one cabinet is to be expanded in the following way:

1 Remove inserted PBAs from cabinet

(if necessary)

2 Prepare all cabinets included in the PBX by removing the break-off piece B on the cabinet sideplate(s)
that is to be mounted adjacent to another cabinet’s side plate

3 Now insert the shielding gaskets A (enclosed with expansion kit) in the hole B as shown below

Outer surface
of cabinet

A
A
B

NOTE: For some markets, the cabinets are B

already prepared for flat ribbon cable
connection and the shielding gaskets are B
mounted.

4.2.1 Interconnection of Back Planes

Flat ribbon cable 591 685/2 Interconnect the back planes of the adjusted cabinets using
the flat ribbon cable (591 685/2). Lead the cable through the
holes B that are equipped with shielding gaskets in the cabi-
Keyed net sideplates and connect the flat ribbon cable to the rele-
vant connector in the back plane.

Note: The connector is keyed.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

4.2.2 Wall mounting 4.3 Safety Rules

1 Mount brackets (SXA 112 4406/3), for all To fulfil electrical safety requirements IEC 950/
cabinets, on the wall. See figure below EN 60950 respectively EN 41003, the exchange must
2 Mount the cabinets onto the brackets be connected to protective earth. Local requirements
shall be adhered to. Before operating, ensure that the
3 Adjust the cabinets by pushing them
Power switch
towards each other. snap-on Front edge
wrist strap
The "square holes" enable the cabinets to be moved to connector
both sides a few millimetres, that the contact springs of
(only for
the shielding gaskets always have good contact to one AUSTRIA)
another.
The lower retaining screws are used to secure the Label
cabinets in the correct position: SVB 101 03/1 Cabinet 0
4 Mark the position of the screws and
remove the cabinet(s) from the wall Wall
Connection
5 Drill and plug the retaining holes for protective Label
earth SVB BS 101 02
6 Mount the cabinet(s) and secure them,
using all retaining screws.
From To cabinet 1
protective or integrated MDF
Mounting of exchange cabinet 0-2 earth source
If more than one
cabinet, ensure Top of BDV 113 08 To cabinet 2
break-off piece
on 2nd/ 3rd bracket
23mm 10,5mm cross sectional area greater than 6 mm2
fits tightly to previous NOTE:If the earth is not connected,
a possible strike of lightning
Break off and might cause a fire!
remove, for the
first cabinet chassis is connected to a hard wired protective earth.
SXA 112 4406/3
NOTE: Make sure that a sound ground connection to
188 mm 73 mm
the exchange has been established. Other-
wise this can be hazardous in case of light-
ning.

Note: The wrist strap must have a 1MOhm series

protection resistor to comply to the safety
390 mm

standards. If this resistor is missing, then

accidentally touching live wires can be leathal.

4.3.1 Safety statement for line connection

226 mm Maximum 8 mm All line interfaces in the PBX are protected in

between cabinets accordance with K.21 (voltage transients up to 1.5 kV).
BTU-A, BTU-A2, BTU-B, BTU-C, BTU-D and BTU-E
Drill holes for mounting brackets 23 mm higher are working with interface TNV.
than the top of the cabinet.
All other boards and the V.24 port work with interface
SELV.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 9(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

4.4 Power Supply Note: The PBX shall have its own mains fuse and
must be connected to an earthed mains outlet
The power supplies listed below are designed to be This transformer is available for the following mains
powered by sinusoidal mains voltages: voltages:
• A transformer 36 - 38 VAC, 50-60 Hz; • for 230 V RES 147 051/1
325 VA (RES 147 051/_)
• for 127 V RES 147 051/3
• A fused external DC source
(42V...56V, 48 V nom.; 5.0 A) Mounting of the transformer unit

• A power supply with battery charger To mount the transformer unit in the rear of the cabinet
(BML 351 048, 48 V; 5.0 A) BDV 113 08 insert the unit from the top into the slot at
(BML 351 013, 48 V; 5.0 A) the rear of the cabinet with the mounting holes facing
to the front. Align with the 4 cabinet holes and fasten
As the power feeding input of the PBX is equipped with securely with the supplied self-etching TORX screws.
a rectifier bridge, the same input can be used to con-
nect 36 V AC or polarity-independent 48 V DC.
Both transformer and switched mode power supply are
mounted on the rear of the cabinet and the power con-
nection is shown below.

4.4.1 Mains transformer

In a standard installation the PBX is fed by a protective

safety class I transformer with a rated secondary volt-
age of 36 VAC.

exchange power cable

TRE 990 113/850
Mounting of the transformer unit
Use the cable TRE 990 113/850 to connect the trans-
former to the exchange. Plug in the 4-pole connector
to the AC outlet of the transformer unit and connect the
other end to the flatpin connectors on the input filter in
the cabinet.
Technical data:
Input voltage tolerance +/- 10%
Input frequency 50/60 Hz
Dielectric strength
primary/secondary 3500V

• Fuse ratings for transformer unit

Secondary
AC output

voltage version primary secondary

Primary

230 V T 3.15 A T 6.3 A

fuse

fuse

Mains
cable 127 V T 6.3 A T 6.3 A
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 10(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

4A This graph shows the dependency of mains voltage deviation to

available DC current

available DC output current. This will result in reduced line length for
digital instruments. the available output current versus mains volt-
3A age for RES 147 051/1

2A
safe operating area

1A

190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 VAC mains voltage

4.4.2 Power Supply with battery charger (BML 351 013/_)

For installation of the switched mode battery charger, alarm interface and batteries refer to the document
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML 351 013) describing the batteries and charger.

4.4.3 Power Supply with battery charger (BML 351 048)

A switched mode power supply is available for applications where a higher current than the transformer and/or a bat-
tery backup for the PBX is required. This unit can also be used without battery backup. For installation of alarm inter-
face and batteries refer to the document INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-BML 351 048) describing the batter-
ies and charger.

4.5 Backplane (ROA 119 5132) PUB 6

DC in ut use cable
The PUB 6TSRis mounted
xxxxxx in the cabinet BDV 113 08. The board
is equipped with an input recitifier for 36VAC or 48VDC from
the transformer or battery charger. The on board DC/DC con-
verter steps down to the system voltages. Additionally up to
TEST POINTS
FOR DC VOLTAGES nine add on boards can be connected.
The output buffer to the next cabinet can be disabled by
means of the DIP-switch location B (pos. OFF) when mount-
ed.
A Replacing the PUB 6 (refer to drawing on left)
Unscrew the TORX no. 10 screws in the four corners. The
B squeeze the protruding plastic holders in the locations A .
Remove the heat sink on the rectifier to access the holder be-
low. Remove board and replace with new one.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 11(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

4.6 Power supervision on ELU-A

The ELU-A board is equipped with an automatic traffic limiter restricting the internal power dissipation on the board to
a maximum of 12 W. This depends on both the line length and the number of lines busy.
When the power consumption exceeds this limit, no more lines can be accessed and until at least two lines go on
hook again are all lines accessible.
When connecting external voice systems a maximum of 8 lines are recommended on each board. The remaining
lines on the board are to low traffic extensions.

4.7 System Power Consumption

The power demand of the system comprises the sum of the current demands of all extensions, base stations etc.
This total current has to be delivered by the power supply. Choose the one delivering the rated current with a suitable
margin for add on equipment depending on the installation site.
Base Station Power Demand
To minimise the power dissipation on the serial communication wires EPP should be used extensively. Up to 60 BS
can be installed in a cabinet. Short power peaks can be covered by installing a battery cabinet.
The current limit for remote feeding to the BS per IC-LU is 1.5A on the 48V if supplied from the backplane and 2.1A
when supplied via an external power input at the front of the connector. The total current for all BS must be less than
the power supply(s) capacity. The total 48 VDC load on the power supply has to be calculated as follows:

This table states the current demand in mA for a Base Sta-

Cable STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP STD EPP
length 0,6 mm ∅ 0,6 mm ∅
tion depending on the cable length and cable diameter.
0,5 mm ∅ 0,5 mm ∅
0m 104 104 104 104 77 104 104 104 Calculation example:
100m 110 106 108 106 83 106 108 106 Line length to Base Station: 700m
200m 114 110 110 108 87 110 110 108
Resistance of loop: 0.18 Ω/m
300m 121 112 114 109 94 112 114 109
400m
Cable diameter (φ): 0,6 mm
129 115 118 110 103 115 118 110
500m 119 112 119 112 Assuming 7 Base Stations are already
600m 121 114 121 114 connected they consume a current of: 1300 mA
700m 125 117 125 117 Current of BS 0,6 (φ) and 700m: + 117 mA
800m 129 118 129 118
900m 133 121 133 121 Total current for all Base Stations is: 1417mA
1,0km 139 123 139 123 (This current can be supplied by the back plane)
1,1km 146 125 146 125
1,2km 152 127 152 127
Power demand taken from Power Calcu-
1,3km 160 129 160 129 lations below, for telephones, boards: 3175mA
1,4km 171 131 171 131
1,5km 183 135 183 135
Total load on power supply: 4592mA
1,6km 204 137 204 137 This total load for the exchange can be supplied by the bat-
tery charger as it is less than 5A.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 12(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Extension Power Demand

TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION TELEPHONES CURRENT CONSUMPTION

Typ (mA) Max (mA) Typ (mA) Max (mA)
BASIC DBC 210 14 35 OPERATOR DBC 214 40 120
DBC 199 25 35 DBC 663 67 110
CONSOLE DBC 754 75
ECONOMY DBC 601 27 32
DBC 751 38 DBC 214 with 2 DBY 409 01 35 70
ECONOMYplus DBC 211 14 35 DBC 214 with 4 DBY 409 02*) 35 70
DBC 201 30 50
DBC 212 14 35 ANALOGUE 40
STANDARD (in active state)
DBC 202 30 50
DBC 631 65 70 TAU 2610 4 4
DBC 755 50 73
DBC 752 Desktop Adapter 23
50 73
DBC 213 35 70 BTU-B (S-interface
EXECUTIVE 35 70 per physical link) 50
DBC 203
DBC 662 70 73 BTU-C
DBC 753 75 index (/1,/2) 1) (per trunk) 14 35
DBC 213 with 2 DBY 409 01 42 70
35 70 50
Radio base station: refer to table above
DBC 213 with 4 DBY 409 02*)
1
) provides current on trunk lines in active state to public exchange.
The maximum values for telephones result when all LEDs are lit and if available, loudspeaking is on at max. volume.
*) with connected external power supply.
Power calculation example

LINE EQUIPMENT QUANTITY CURRENT (mA) The BDV 113 08 can be equipped with two different
DBC 199 32 800 power supplies. The transformer unit supplies an AC
DBC 201 20 600 current that is rectified on the backplane in the cabinet.
The available DC current for the transformer unit
DBC 202 10 300
is 3.5 A. Using the switched mode power supply with
DBC 203 3 105 battery charger a DC current of 5.0 A is available.
DBC 214 1 70 To calculate the available current for the telephone sets
Power for boards 800 subtract 0.8 A for the boards installed in the exchange.
Battery charging 500 If backup batteries are connected to the BML unit, sub-
TOTAL 66 3175 tract again 0.5 A for charging the batteries.

The calculation above shows how to calculate the current demand for a given installation. This amount of current has
to be supplied by the installed power supply.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 13(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5 BOARD POSITIONS
Handling of PBAs
Service personnel shall always connect themselves to ground to prevent damage caused by static discharges.
Boards with Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) are marked with a sign.

Some of the benefits of

ESD protection are:
-less failures/service calls Use portable equipment as
-lower maintenance costs protection against
-higher customer satisfaction electrostatic discharges
e.g. LYA 30101

In the interest of quality and reliability of the system boards always handle static sensitive boards with
special care. Always use a wrist strap connected to a low resistance ground e.g. provided on the cabinet.

5.1 Board position numbering

Note the slot numbering for entire PBX The values in brackets define the cabinet numbering
0 1 2 3 8 16 17 18 19 24 48 49 50 51 56
for Integrated Cordless as used by the Cordless
System Manager.
Board position numbering for:
the basic unit: 0,1 --- 8.
first additional unit: 16,17 --- 24.
last additional unit: 48,49 --- 56.

1 1 1 = Flat ribbon cable 591 685/2

Cabinet 0 (1*) Cabinet 1 (2*) Cabinet 2 (4*)

5.2 Placing of boards

The cabinet BDV 113 08 is prepared for arbitrary furnishing of boards belonging to the ASB15002 system but certain
constraints should be considered for best performance results. The cabinet 0 is to be equipped as follows:
Pos. 0 Reserved for CPU-D_
Pos. 1-8 Available for arbitrary PBA configuration like IC-CU_, IC-LU, ELU-_,VMU-D, AUX_, BTU-_ and REG.
Pos. 8 VMU-HD thermal considerations regarding the hard disk require this position. If any other position has to
be chosen then the board in the next right hand position should be one of the following: AUX_, REG,
BTU-D or free space.
Note: It is advisable to use a maximum of two BTU-Ds in one PBX. Not applicable if used as REG board.
Arbitrary board configuration on positions 1, 2 - 56. The Integrated Cordless system should be installed within one
cabinet furnished with a PUB5 or higher. This leaves room for a maximum of 7 IC-LUs. RASC cannot detect IC-LU
boards installed in the system so it is advisable to locate these boards to the right of the IC-CU_ board. IC-LU boards
can be removed and replaced without needing to shut down the exchange. All boards except the CPU-D_ can be ex-
changed under power provided that the board is replaced by a board of the same type and configuration. New boards
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 14(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

e.g. to upgrade the system, can be installed under power in a free slot of the cabinet.
Sub-equipped boards:
Install sub-equipped boards in the last position after the standard boards to enable easy upgrading without having to
re-number trunks and extensions.
When installing boards with ground brackets in a cabinet of an earlier release not prepared for them, take out the
screws of the ground brackets at the top and bottom of the boards. Then bend the bracket at the top slightly away
from the cabinet to allow a clearance for the front cover to slip on correctly.

front cover bend

cabinet BDV 113 08

ROF xxx xxxx

5.2.1 EMC

The ferrites, with the ERICSSON ordering number STF 82 601, should be situated close to the slot where the cables
are led out of the cabinet. Two turns through the ferrite core are sufficient to comply with EN 55022 Class B and to
avoid disturbances in non-industrial, residential (home) usage.

5.3 Connection of CM-boards

Line 0 - 1 Connect the correct type of call metering board, accord-

ing to the figure below, on BTU-A board ROF 157 5110/_
CM- or ROF 157 5127/_ and in the same fashion on the
board BTU-C board ROF 157 5111/_. The BTU-C cannot be
equipped with a CM50 board as the flat ribbon cable can-
not be connected and CM12/16 (ROA 219 5135/1).
Line 2 - 3
The following boards are available CM50
ROA 219 5064/1, with flat ribbon cable and CM12/16
ROA 219 5135/1 or ROA 219 5062/1 without cable.
For exact positioning of CM-boards, make use of all
pin-connectors.
Line 4 - 5

Note: When installing a CM50-board connect the cable before mounting the CM50-board. The BTU-A board must
also be connected to earth.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 15(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.4 BTU-A (ROF 157 5110/_) and 5.5 Power failure circuit (PFC)
BTU-A2 (ROF 157 5120/_)
In the event of mains failure and if no back-up battery
On delivery from the factory both contacts are in the is connected to the PBX, a relay on the BTU-A and
OFF position, and the line is a normal trunk. BTU-C (see under BTU-C on next page) board auto-
matically switches the trunk lines (generally 2) to ana-
When both contacts on a DIP-switch are set to position logue telephones, if connected to this board.
ON, the line is to be regarded as a music source input.
Different contact positions are not allowed.
BTU-A & BTU-C1
Note: Only lines 4 - 7 can be used as a music source PFb BTC b ELUA
input. Not available on BTU-A subequipped a
ROF 157 5127/_.
PFa
The DIP-switch is shown
Power failure set
with both contacts in 85
OFF position La
ON
Trunk Lb Indicator
Line 4

1 2
Relay shown in power fail position

Line 5 If an ELU-A board is installed these telephones can be

86 used during normal operation and in case of power
failure they will be automatically connected to the pub-
Line 6 lic exchange.

87
88 Line 7

Connection field 6
LA0 A C
18 LA1
LB0
20 LB1
LA2
22 LA3
LB2
24 LB3 Line wires for
26 LA5 connection to
LA4 Public Exchange
LB4 28 LB5
*)
LA6
30 LA7

LB6
32 LB7

*) Not available on sub-equipped board see below

Add range data information on levels
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 16(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.6 BTU-C (ROF 157 5111/_)

Connection field 4
Not always mounted Connection field 4 and 6
(market-dependent) Connection of
A C analogue telephone RED
PFa0 18 a0 YELLOW The index number
4 refers to the individual
Connection to GREEN
on the board
PFb0 20 b0 ELU-A board

PFa1 22 a1 power failure (field 4)

A C
PFb1 24 b1 PFa0 a0
PFb0 b0
18

20 On the BTU-A2 the

bottom half of this
connector is used
22 to connect to PTT Connection of Connection to
signalling ground analogue telephone ELU-A board
Connection 24
trunk lines (field 6)
to analogue
telephone(s) Connection to A C
A C ELU-A board La_0 La_1
Lb_0 Lb_1
PFa2 26 a0 Only mounted if the BTU-A
La_2 La_3
has 4 PFC circuits (market Lb_2 Lb_3
PFb2 28 b0 dependent).
La_4 La_5
Lb_4 Lb_5
PFa3 30 a1 This connector is used
La_6 La_7
for PFC circuits on the
Lb_6 Lb_7
PFb3 32 b1 BTU-A2
The BTU-C (ROF 1575 111/1) features eight incoming
Earth connection on BTU-A2 (Austria only) trunk lines with DID. The first four individuals can also
Some markets require an earth connection of the in- be used for outgoing traffic.
coming PTT earth (functional earth) to the exchange.
This is provided on the connector installed above the
PFC circuit connector on pins A22, A24, C22 and C24.
Use an extra Krone bar to connect the PTT earth wires
to the wires going to the board connector.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 17(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.7 BTU-B (ROF 157 5121/_) 5.8 BTU-B2 (ROF 157 5121/_)

Applies for indices 1 and 3 Applies for indices 4 and 5

The BTU-B provides connection for up to 8 physical
links and every physical link can be configured as a S-
or T-interface in point-to-point or multi-point mode. On
the S-interface every link provides remote power feed-
ing with 40V/50 mA = 2W and connection for up to 8 418
terminals.
C

C
ON

D
410 411

418 412 413

414 415

416 417

C Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

ON

ON

D Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 4

410 411
DIP-switches position 410-417
ON

ON

412 413
These switches control S- and T-interface termination
414 415 and S-interface power feeding on the link 0...7.
ON

ON

416 417 On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF

Connects power feeding ground

4
ON

ON

Connects -40V for power feeding

3

A Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 1

Connects 100 Ω receive side termination
2

B Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 2

Connects 100 Ω send side termination
ON

C Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/ 3

Note: at the end of each line a termination resistor
D Insert PROM "RYS 102 521/4 must be installed (e.g. in the last wall outlet).
The switch 1 selects the termination on the transmitter
interface and switch 2 selects the termination on the
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 18(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

receiver interface. Switches 3 and 4 enable remote Using the S/T Bus Interface Circuit eXtended (SBCX)
power feeding to ISDN terminals connected to a link. up to13 dB line attenuation can be covered. The figure
When connected as S-interface switches 1...4 should below shows the ranges using standard 0.6 mm diam-
be set to ON. eter twisted pair unshielded cables with a capacitive
load of max. 30nF per km and the terminal equipment
Switch position 418
(refer to documentation of the TE) is also equipped
with a SBCX or equivalent.
When selecting which link is to be configured
as a S-/Q-/T-interfaces start with switch:
1 km (standard range)
Line pairs: TE
and up to 2 km with
SBCX
Q/T-interface 0+1 TEs equipped with SBCX
4

2+3 TE TE TE
3

OFF... Q/T-Interface
up to 500 m (standard range)
ON ...S-Interface SBCX
4+5 and up to 1.5 km with
2

TE TE TE TEs equipped with SBCX

ON

6+7
1

BTU-B
Ranges on the extended passive bus
S-interface
Short passive bus
On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF
d1
Note: When selecting S- or T-interfaces start by
setting the T-interfaces using switches 4, 3, 2
d4
and 1 in consecutive order then set the with TR BTU-B
S-interfaces starting with switches 1, 2, 3 and 4. in outlet
d3

Settings of the S-interface TE TE TE

d1 - 150m to 250m (standard range) d4 - up to 1m

Choose with RASC the configuration of the interface: d3 - line to terminal up to 10m
Extended passive bus default setting
and Short passive bus. Extended passive bus

Ranges on the interface d1

d2
The BTU-B is equipped with the S/T Bus Interface Cir-
cuit eXtended (SBCX). This circuit offers the advan- d4
with TR BTU-B
in outlet d3
tage of covering a higher attenuation on cables.
TE
TE TE
The standard S/T-interface specification considers ca-
d1 - up to 500m (standard range), d2 - between terminals
bles with 6,5 dB attenuation equivalent to about 1000m 1,5 km on 30 nF cables with 25 to 50 meters
cable length in single terminal configuration. TEs equipped with SBCX
d3 - line to terminal up to 10m d4 - up to 1m

Abbreviations:
TE Terminal Equipment
TR Termination Resistor (installed at the end of the
interface line. Use outlets with resistor mounted)
Outlet according to IEC 603-7 with termination
Outlet according to IEC 603-7 without termina-
tion
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 19(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.9 BTU-D (ROF 157 5112/1) and

Connection field 6
A C REG (ROF 157 5112/2)
T0A
02 R0A
T0B
04 R0B
A
T1A
06 R1A The DIP-switch is
T1B shown with B
08 R1B
both contacts in
T2A
10 R2A
OFF position
T2B
12 R2B ON
197
T3A
14 R3A
T3B S/T-Interface for 200
16 R3B 1 2
T4A connecting trunks
18 R4A
and S-terminals
T4B
20 R4B
T5A
22 R5A
T5B
24 R5B
T6A 26 R6A

T6B 28 R6B

T7A 30 R7A

T7B 32 R7B 199

Wall outlet connection
198
EIA/TIA 568 Wiring Schemes
4 5
Pin desig- NT function: TE function:
6 3 nation (polarity of remote (polarity of remote
power feeding) power feeding)
8 1
5 Transmit (-) Receive (-) A Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/1
7 2 4 Transmit (-) Receive (-)

3 Receive (+) Transmit (+) B Insert PROM "RYS 102 5xx/2

6 Receive (+) Transmit (+)
Wiring side of 8-pole
wall outlet e.g. Power source 3(+)
KRONE RJ-K LN 1 Power sink 3 (+)
2 Power source 3(-)
optional

Power sink 3 (-)

5.9.1 DIP-switches in position 197 and 200
7 Power source 2(-) Power sink 2(-)
8 Power source 2(+) Power sink 2(+)
Depending on the firmware used, this board enables
S-interface in T-interface on
socket plug either ISDN or CAS function. The PROM set is availa-
1 ble for CAS (LZY203 2212/1) or ISDN PRA
(LZY203 2213/1). DIP-switch pos. 197 on BTU-D se-
lects the register function of the board. The switch 200
is reserved for future use.

197/1 197/2 FUNCTION

OFF OFF digital trunk MFC only
ON digital trunk MFE BTU-D
ON OFF Register MFC BTU-D
ON Register MFE or REG.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 20(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.9.2 DIP-switches in positions 198 and 199 Connection field 6

Selection of ground strapping for the coax 75 Ω or se- A C

18 RING_OUT
lection of the 120 Ω twisted pair interface. 19
20 TIP_OUT
Connection for 75 Ω
198/1 198/2 FUNCTION 22 RING_IN coaxial cable
199/1 199/2 23 TIP_IN
24
OFF OFF 120 Ω connection1) 26 LA1 Outgoing
28 LB1 wires Connection for
OFF ON screen connected to ground
120 Ω twisted pairs
30 LA2 Incoming
ON OFF screen connected to ground
via 1nF capacitor 32 wires
LB2
0V
1. ) Factory setting
Some markets (e.g. Austrian PTT) require the use of a
On factory delivery the switches are set to OFF-posi- double-shielded interface cable. The outer shield
tion = no ground thus enabling 120 Ω interface with a should be connected to frame earth and the inner
twisted pair cable. These DIP-switches connect the shield should be connected to 0V on the board. A 20 m
75 Ω interface coax screen to ground, either directly to long standard cable is available with the ERICSSON
0V or via a 1 nF capacitor. DIP-switch 198 switches the ordering number TSR 901 0481/20000.
receiver and 199 the transmitter side. The screen shall
normally be grounded on the transmitter side. Normal-
ly, the screen on the reception side is not connected to
ground. Refer to local market requirements
Ranges on the interface of the BTU-D
This interface covers the short distance to the next NT
or Line Terminating Unit as the end point of a public or
private network. The range is only defined in terms of
the covered attenuation by the interface that is 6 dB. If
required choose cables with low attenuation to achieve
a maximum distance.

Coax 75 Ω and twisted pair 120 Ω interface

d1

Line terminating unit BTU-D

d1 - The line length depends on cable type used. The board
allows 6 dB cable attenuation at 1.024 MHz. Check cable
attenuation at 1,024 MHz per 100m.

For ranges exceeding 6 dB attenuation additional digit-

al data transmission equipment is required. Line Ter-
minating Unit (LTU) ASB 501 04 is available for such
purposes.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 21(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.10 BTU-E (ROF 157 5113/_)

SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS M-WIRE CONNECTION SETTINGS

2-wire connection 4-wire connection APPLICATION SPEECH M-WIRES
106...406 108/308 106...406 108/308
on on on on PAGING S6..off
2-wire S7..off
S8..off
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 AMERICAN S6, S7 and S8
4-wire
E&M see local
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 SIGNALLING requirements
DOUBLE 4-wire S6..on
INDIVIDUAL 0 INDIVIDUAL 1 M-WIRE S7..on
SIGNALLING S8..off
uses switches 106 and 108/1 uses switches 206 and 108/2
CAILHO E&M S6..off
INDIVIDUAL 2 INDIVIDUAL 3 4-wire S7..off
SIGNALLING
S8..off
uses switches 306 and 308/1 uses switches 406 and 308/2
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 S6..off
SPEECH CONNECTION SETTINGS 4-wire S7..off
Only on /2 boards S8..off
Switches select between 2- or 4-wire speech
connection. Two individuals share switches 108 S6 connects -48V to M1 terminal via 6.2 Kohm
and 308 S7 connects 0V to M0 wire locally.
On boards with Rev. R2A these switches are re- S8 connects 0V to M20-wire.
placed by relays. These relays are set automat-
ically by programming the filter coefficients.

Connection field 4 and 6 at front of BTU-E_

Speech (field 4) RED
YELLOW
A C GREEN
LA_0 18 LC_0 YELLOW
LB_0 20 LD_0 GREEN
108 308
LA_1 22 LC_1 LA & LB - 2-wire send/
LB_1 24 LD_1 receive or 4-wire send.
LA_2 26 LC_2 LC & LD - 4-wire receive.
LB_2 28 LD_2
LA_3 30 LC_3
0

LB_3
32
LD_3 106
INDIVIDUALS

Signalling (field 6)
206
1

A C
M2_0 E2_0
306
2

M20_0 E20_0
M2_1 E2_1
M20_1 E20_1
406
3

1 M2_2 E2_2
M20_2 E20_2
M2_3 E2_3 109
S6 S7 S8
3

M20_3 E20_3
INDIVIDUALS

M1_0 E1_0
209
1 2

M0_0 E0_0
1

M1_1 E1_1
on

309
2

M0_1 E0_1
1 M1_2 E1_2
3

M0_2 E0_2 409

M1_3 E1_3
M0_3 E0_3

1 M20_ and M0_ can be switched by S7 and S8 to 0V on M-WIRE SETTINGS

the BTU-E_ locally.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 22(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.10.1 Paging connection

The figure shows how to connect the paging equipment Ericall Contactor with 2 wire speech. The PBX sends paging
information to paging system (pin 6A18) using M1 contact, and information about ’paging in progress’ or ’paging
equipment not present’ is received on the E1-wire (pin 6C18) from the paging equipment.

Switch settings
on This switch setting is used for
signalling on E1 and M1.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX Paging equipment

Z
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

S5 4A20 LB

0V

S7 M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V

Figure showing Paging equipment and 2-wire speech with ’loop connection’ of the E&M-wires.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 23(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.10.2 Four wire speech connection

The four wire speech and signalling connection has the benefit of not needing additional signalling wires. There are
two different types of signalling supported:
Cailho E&M-signalling (balanced battery). The two way signalling utilises common mode DC pulses via the centre
tap of the transformer. On one side a detector is connected between the -48 VDC and the centre tap of the
transformer. The other end uses opto relay M4 to switch the line to 0V (Ground). The detector reads the current flow
to ground every time M4 closes.
CEPT L1/SSAC 15 with 2280 Hz tones. In this case no DC signalling is used but instead signalling is performed by
switching on and off a 2280 Hz tone, which is detected by a tone receiver on the other side. This is only available on
index 2 boards.

Switch settings
on This switch setting inhibits signalling on E1 and M1. Only AC or DC
signalling on the four wire speech connection is used.

1 2 3
S6 S7 S8
Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

2280 Hz PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
M4
0V
Detector
autom. 2/4wire

-48V
DSLAC

1uF 560 Ω 4A20 LB

0V
2280 Hz 4C18 LC
detector

Detector -48V 0V

4C20 LD
0V

Figure showing Cailho E&M signalling and CEPT L1 or SSAC 15 with tone signalling
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 24(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.10.3 E&M-signalling

Signalling on E & M wires is done either using one or two E&M pairs depending on what is required. Using just E1
and M1 is a very common practice. One case to mention is the American E&M signalling where the M1 wire toggles
between -48VDC and 0V.
Double E&M signalling requires the E1/M1 wires for the signalling of information and the E2/M2 wires indicate
blocking of the connection. The E1/M1-wires are used for signalling and E2/M2-wires are used for blocking. The
figure shows 0V connection to the M-wires in both ends.

Switch settings
Standard E & M signalling Double E & M signalling
on This switch setting is used on This is the switch setting when
for signalling on E1 and M1. E1, E2, M1 and M2 are used for
signalling.
1 2 3 1 2 3
S6 S7 S8 S6 S7 S8

Applies for switches 109, 209, 309 and 409.

PBX PBX or channel equipment

R
4A18 LA
autom. 2/4wire
DSLAC

4A20 LB
0V
4C18 LC

S8** 4C20 LD
0V
M3**
-48V **application specific
toggles between 0 and -48VDC
S7 (e.g. American signalling)
M1
0V 6A18 M1 E1
Detector -48V

6A20 M0 E0
0V

-48V

6C18 E1 M1
-48V Detector 0V

6C20 E0 M0
0V
S6 M2
0V 6A02 M2 E2 Detector -48V

6A04 M20 E20 0V

6C02 E2 M2
-48V Detector 0V

0V 6C04 E20 M20

Figure showing four wire speech and standard (double) E&M signalling.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 25(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.11 CPU-D_ (ROF 157 5118/_) and Connections on the CPU-D_

AUX_(ROF1575 119/_) For connection of TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT, see
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION (1531-RPM 603 339).
Before installing the board mount the system software
PROMs in the appropriate positions.
A C

ROF1575118
BS2 9727
CPU-D
R1A
Audio 18
Factory test
Audio 20
red -48 VDC
yellow ALARM 22
green (out) ALARM Polarity
independent
0V 24 ALARM input
External 26
sensor 1 External
sensor 3
0V 28
0V
External
sensor 2 30
Not used
0V 32
Not used

TXD 10 RTS
only this V.24
0V 12 DTR port is active
RXD on the AUX3
14 DCD
board
red DSR 16 CTS
Cold TXD 18 RTS
start
0V 20 DTR
strap
RXD 22 DCD

DSR 24 CTS
TXD 26 RTS
0V 28 DTR

RXD 30 DCD

DSR 32 CTS

The ALARM input is optically isolated and the voltage

has to be between 20 - 60 VDC.
The ALARM output is equipped with an open collector
transistor with a capacity of 20 mA at 12 VDC
(Maximum 14 VDC).
Use the following prefabricated cables to connect the
peripheral data equipment to CPU-D_ and AUX_:
A B • PC is TSR 902 0448/1
A Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x9/ xx • printer is TSR 902 0476/1
B Insert PROM "RYS 102 1x8/ xx • modem is TSR 902 0466/1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 26(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.12 CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) Connections on the CPU-D4

Similar to the previous versions this board provides the
V.24 interfaces but additionally the RS-485 interface for
RYS 102 533/1
RYS 102 533/2

longer ranges. With the software key (FECU)

FW PROMS KDU BS 130 06/_ new functionalities can be ac-
cessed.

red
yellow
green

alarm relay
B18
B22
B20
ABC

Audio 18
ROF1575130
BS2 9727
CPU
R1A
Factory test
Audio 20
-48 VDC
red ALARM 22
RTC

yellow (out) ALARM (in)

green 0V 24 0V
External 26
Temp1 External
FECU Temp3
connector 0V 28
0V
External
2nd Battery RAM
1st Battery RAM

Temp2 30
Not used
0V 32
C B A
Not used

TXD 10 RTS
0V 12 DTR
Battery RAM SW PROMS RXD
KDY BS 101 02/1 14 DCD

DSR 16 CTS
A R9 "RYS 102 191/ x" A R11 "RYS 102 214/ x" red TXD + 18 RTS
B R9 "RYS 102 192/ x" Transmit
B R11 "RYS 102 215/ x"
Coldstart 0V - 20 DTR RS 485
C R9 "RYS 102 193/ x" C R11 "RYS 102 216/ x"
loop

strap
RXD + 22 DCD
Receive
A R10 "RYS 102 204/ x" RS 485
DSR - 24 CTS
B R10 "RYS 102 205/ x"
TXD 26 RTS
C R10 "RYS 102 206/ x"
0V 28 DTR
To put the board in operation mount the system soft- RXD 30 DCD
ware PROMs in the appropriate positions. The number
of battery RAMs mounted on the CPU-D4 board is DSR 32 CTS
functionality dependent.

To connect the RS-485 data interface use plug

RNV 321 01 02 be sure to loop RTS with CTS other-
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 27(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

wise data is lost if printer is OFF. The range of the in- 5.13 ELU-C (ROF 157 5115/1)
terface is up to 1200m.
Several converters may be used but with the following
successful tests were accomplished: This board is used to connect the DBC 7xx series to
IC-485SI from ARP DATACON and the ASB 150 02 system.
232<->485/422 Converter Plus IC-109AE from Black
Box Corp.

Connection field 6 at front of ELU-C

5.12.1 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU)
1 LA0
Connecting this plug activates the appropriate applica- LB0
tions and features as ordered depending on the FECU LA1
index number. If no plug is connected only a limited LB1
6* 1 LA2
Version 4.0 system functionality is available. The indi- LB2
ces 2 to 10 always include the Basic Version 4 func- LA3
tionality (index 1). LB3
LA4 Line wires for
For detailed information of the features enabled by the 10 LB4
different FECUs refer to 15534-ASB 150 02 Uen connection to
1 LA5
FACILITY DESCRIPTION GENERAL. LB5
extension equipment
LA6
LB6
LA7
FECU number Functionality Version 4.0 6*3 LB7
LA8
KDU BS 130 07/1 Basic Version 4.0 functionality LB8
KDU BS 130 07/2 + std. digital networking for max. LA9
10
LB9
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/3 + std. digital networking
KDU BS 130 07/4 + full. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/5 + full. digital networking
KDU BS 130 07/6 + full. digital networking, 4
interfaces and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/7 + std. digital networking for max.
32 interfaces and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/8 + std. digital networking and CTI
KDU BS 130 07/9 + CTI + full. digital networking for
max. 32 interfaces
KDU BS 130 07/10 + CTI + full. digital networking for
unlimited number of interfaces
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 28(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.14 ELU-A and ELU-D_

These terms and connections apply in connection
The connection of extension boards described in this field 6 at front of an ELU-D(3) and ELU-A
chapter are:
• ELU-A (ROF 1575 114/1)
• ELU-A2 (ROF 1575 114/2)
(LA16) LA0 A C
• ELU-D (ROF 1575 116/_) 02 LA1 (LA17)
(LB16) LB0
• ELU-D3 (ROF 157 5130/_) 04 LB1 (LB17)
(LA18) LA2
06 LA3 (LA19)
(LB18) LB2
08 LB3 (LB19)
10 LA3 (LA21)
(LA20) LA4
12 LB5 (LB21)
(LB20) LB4
(LA22) LA6 14 LA7 (LA23)
4

This switch is mount- (LB22) LB6 Extension Line

16 LB7 (LB23)
connector to
3

ed for future use 18 LA9 (LA25)

(LA24) LA8 terminal
LB9 (LB25) equipment
20
2

(LB24) LB8
ON

22 LA11 (LA27)
1

(LA26) LA10
(LB26) LB10 LB11 (LB27)
24
(LA28) LA12
26 LA13 (LA29)

28 LB13 (LB29)
(LB28) LB12
30 LA15 (LA31)
(LA30) LA14
(LB30) LB14
32 LB15 (LB31)

The connections in field 4 are in brackets (only on

ELU-D3 for individuals 16 to 31)

On the first ELU-D_ board in the system the first three

extension positions should be used to connect the
OPERATOR telephones.
On sub-equipped ELU-A and ELU-D_ boards the con-
nection for extensions 8...15 (32) are not mounted.

Example: view of the ELU-D3 board

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 29(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.15 MFU (ROF 157 5132/_)

Board disconnected red

VMU,ELU-A/D Line blocked yellow RYS102 538/2
Line busy green
RYS102 538/1

COMPACT
FLASH S41 is for S42 refer to next page
CARD
future use
ROF1575128/1
only!
BS2 9627
IC-CU
R1A

41
trunks&REG yellow

ON

ON
ELU- ext. green
42
A C
LA0 18 LA1
168
ON

LB0 20 LB1
Analogue
extension LA2 22 LA3 S168/2 ON: ground key detection
PORT disabled
LB2 24 LB3
S168/1 ON: increased current
LA0 02 LA1 feeding on line 0 on the analogue
extension port 0.(45 mA)
LB0 04 LB1

LA2 06 LA3
Digital LB2 08 LB3 155
extension 154
LA4 10 LA5
ON

PORT
ON

LB4 12 LB5 156 157

ON

ON

LA6 14 LA7

LB6 16 LB7 The switches 154 to 157 control the S- and

T0A 18 R0A T-interface termination and S-interface
T0B power feeding on the links 0...3.
20 R0B

T1A 22 R1A Connects power feeding ground

3 4

ISDN - T1B 24 R1B Connects -40V for power feeding

PORT Connects 100 Ω receive side termination
1 2

T2A 26 R2A
Connects 100 Ω send side termination
ON

S/T-Interface for
T2B 28 R2B
connecting trunks
and S-terminals T3A 30 R3A The DIP-switch is shown with
four contacts in OFF position
T3B 32 R3B (factory setting)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 30(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

The ISDN PART The VMU PART

DIP-switches position 154 to 157 The VMU functionality and the (4) registers are availa-
ble if the Compact Flash Card is inserted.
Switch 1 selects the termination on the send side.
Switch 2 selects the termination on the receiver side. For installation and configuration refer to the stipula-
Switches 3 and 4 enable remote power feeding to the tions in document START OF OPERATION
connected ISDN terminals. Switches 1...4 should be (1537-ASB150 02Uen) .
set to ON if the link is set as S-interface .
Note: The VMU will not start up without the internal
Note: At the end of each line a termination resistor directories created on the Compact Flash Card.
must be installed (e.g. in the last wall outlet). The unlock key (file named DISK.ULK) must be
valid on the compact flash card.
Switch position 42
The MFU board can use only flash cards supplied by
When selecting S- or T-interfaces start by setting the
ERICSSON. These flash cards are delivered with a
T-interfaces using switches 4, 3, 2 and 1 in consecutive
control file called DISK.ULK containing a licence key.
order then set the S-interfaces starting with switches 1,
This file must not be opened by any tool as this would
2, 3 and 4.
distroy the file and thus disable the compact flash card.
This will cause an error condition indicated by slow
Q/T-interface Link: flashing yellow and green extension LEDs.
0
3 4

Limitations:
OFF... Q/T-Interface 1
ON ...S-Interface 2 Only four MFU boards may be mounted per system.
1 2

MFU board(s) can be mixed with VMU-HD board(s)

ON

3
but if a MFU board is installed, no VMU-D board may
S-interface be installed in the system.

On factory delivery all switches are set to OFF If a MFU board is installed without compact flash card,
the complete VMU part is marked inactive. If later on
Settings and ranges on the T-/S-interface the MFU will be upgraded with a compact flash card,
then this can not be done by using the Hot swapping
Refer to section 5.8 on page 17 feature, due to different card types. The MFU without
flash card has to be removed completely from the sys-
tem (from HW and SW point of view ) and then the
MFU with flash card can be included in the system.
The prevoius programming of the card, has to be done
again.

The ELU-D3 PART

The DBC 213 and DBC 214 instruments are not
supported with 4 key panels, only 2 key panels per
instrument are allowed to be connected.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 31(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

5.16 VMU-HD (ROF 157 5126/_)

990/1 990/2 FUNCTION
To install unpack the VMU-HD board with the mounted ON or
OFF 16 channels, no register function
hard disk. The Flash disks are available with a capacity OFF
of 60 MB. Remove the transport protection for the hard OFF 8 channels with MFC detection
ON and DTMF / Tone receiver
disk and keep it in case of re-shipment e.g. factory re-
8 channels with MFE detection
pair. Install and configure the VMU-HD in the cabinet ON and DTMF / Tone receiver
according to the stipulations in 1537-ASB15002Uen
START OF OPERATION. Structure of directories on hard disk or Flash card
Note: The VMU-HD will not start up without internal \Info0 \message2 \anno0
directories created on the hard disk. \Info1 \message3 \anno1
\message4 \anno2
The DIP-switch is shown with \message5 \anno3
both contacts in OFF position
(factory setting)
\annoF
ON
Removal of hard disk or Flash card
To remove the hard disk take out the board from the
1 2
system. Disengage the hard disk with lever A and pull
out the hard disk.

990 5.17 VMU-D (ROF 157 5117/1)

The VMU-D has no switches, but is equipped with a

back up battery, RNV 991 942/001 to prevent loss of
data in case of power failure. Install the battery to con-
nection field 4. before the exchange is started. For safe
operation, replace this battery periodically every five
years in accordance with document MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTION (1541-ASB 150 02 Uen).

Installation of battery back-up on VMU-D

PCMCIA Hard/
Flash disk
type III and II

A
Press button to disengage the hard
A
disk and take it out.
DIP switch on VMU-HD
DIP switch 990 selects whether register function is en- Connection
abled or not.
field 4
Battery RNV 991 942/001
Limitations:
Only one VMU-HD can be mounted per cabinet and
just one type either VMU-HD or VMU-D can be in-
stalled in a system.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 32(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6 INTEGRATED CORDLESS The board offers the following connections:

• the Cordless System Manager (on a PC)
The Integrated Cordless (IC) is a digital cordless tele-
phone solution complying to the DECT standard pro- • a printer to log errors
viding wireless connection for up to 108 portables with • 4 Base Stations
the A-protocol and 210 portables in GAP-protocol ap-
plications. Several components comprise a complete • the Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU).
system.
After the system has been physically installed use 6.1.3 Feature Enabling Control Unit (FECU)
RASC and the Cordless System Manager (CSM) for
initialization, maintenance, updating, fault finding and This plug determines which maximum number of port-
when possible to recover the PBX from errors. The ables are allowed to be connected to the system. This
CSM is orderable under LZYNB 201 01 R6A or higher plug is available for various numbers of cordless tele-
for the A-protocol and LZYNB 201 05 R1B or higher for phones. For up to 8 portables no plug is required.
GAP applications.

FECU number Number of Portables

6.1 Board Descriptions
KDU 130 05/1 16
KDU 130 05/2 24
6.1.1 IC-Control Unit (IC-CU)
KDU 130 05/3 32
The IC-CU_ is the control board supporting the A-pro-
KDU 130 05/4 48
tocol and up to 7 IC-LUs located in the same cabinet.
Up to 56 BSs can be connected. The board offers 2 KDU 130 05/5 64
connections for:
KDU 130 05/6 108
• the Cordless System Manager (on a PC)
KDU 130 05/7 210 (only with IC-CU2)
• a printer to log errors.

6.1.2 IC-Control Unit2 (IC-CU2) 6.1.4 IC-Line Unit (IC-LU)

The IC-CU2 is the control board supporting the DECT The IC-LU is the line board controlling up to 8 Base
GAP-protocol and up to 7 IC-LUs located in the same Stations (BS). This board transcodes the voice signal
cabinet. The IC-CU2 includes 8 voice channel units (PCM <-> ADPCM) for 8 simultaneous speech chan-
(SPU as on the IC-LU) and is equipped with 4 BSs in- nels in the Speech Processing Unit (SPU), provides
terfaces. With the maximum of 7 IC-LUs up to 60 BSs echo cancelling, controls the digital link and power
can be connected. feeding. The wiring distance with remote power feed-
ing to the BSs using only the serial communication
The wiring distance with remote power feeding to the wires SC0 and SC1 is limited to 400m.
BSs using only the serial communication wires SC0 For line lengths up to 1600m additional Express Power
and SC1 is limited to 400m. For greater line lengths
additional Express Power feeding Pairs (EPP) need to
be wired. The maximum wire length between BS (fed
locally) and IC-CU2 or IC-LU is only data limited and
may reach up to 1900 meters.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 33(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

feeding Pairs (EPP) need to be wired. The maximum wire length between BS (fed locally) and IC-LU is only data lim-
ited and may reach up to 1900 meters.
In any case the total current capability of the power supply(s) has to be considered. Refer to chapter power consump-
tion of the telephones when calculating total system power demand.
Usually the ranges mentioned above will be sufficient for most installations. For special cases where greater distanc-
es have to be covered, see section 4.7 on page 11. Install the board in the cabinet, after the prerequisites mentioned
in section 5.2 on page 13 have been provided.

6.2 Traffic capacity

The traffic capacity of the Cordless part of the PBX is mainly determined by the IC-CU_ and in exceptional cases also
by the Base Stations. The IC-CU can handle a maximum of 56 simultaneous calls and the IC-CU2 can handle up to
60 simultaneous calls. Each Base Station has a capacity of 8 simultaneous calls.
The traffic capacity of the IC-CU_ is determined by:
• the Grade Of Service (GOS) required by the customer
• the number of speech circuits available, with a limit of 64.
The Grade Of Service is the probability that a call is rejected because of system congestion. The customer has to in-
dicate which Grade Of Service is acceptable. A Grade Of Service of 1%, or 0.01, means an average of 1 lost call in
every 100 calls.
The IC-CU2 and each IC-LU is equipped with a SPU providing 8 speech circuits that are shared by the whole cord-
less system. So the number of installed (up to 7) IC-LUs determine how many circuits are available to the system.
The two parameters mentioned above (GOS and the number of speech circuits) and the total amount of traffic (Er-
lang) that is required, are related to each other. The table below shows the capacity at a required GOS. Practically,
this table is used to calculate from a given GOS and Erlang value the number of IC-LUs needed. The Erlang value is
the total traffic generated by all portables. The table below shows the Erlang values for a number of speech channels
and at a required GOS.
Systems with IC-CU2 Systems with IC-CU Speech Grade of service (GOS)
Number of IC-LUs Number of IC-LUs circuits 2% 1% 0.5% 0.1%
0 1 8 3.6 3.2 2.7 2.1
1 2 16 9.8 8.9 8.1 6.7
2 3 24 16.6 15.3 14.2 12.2
3 4 32 23.8 22.1 20.6 18.2
4 5 40 31 29 27.3 24.5
5 6 48 38.4 36.1 34.2 30.9
Note: 64 speech chan-
6 7 56 45.9 43.3 41.2 37.5 nels are available but only
60 portables can simulta-
7 - 64 53.4 50.6 48.3 44.2
neously initiate calls
For the calculation it is necessary to estimate the time the portables actually make calls. The table below shows the
Erlang value depending on the estimated mean call-minutes for a portable telephone. These values may be different
between departments depending on their activities. These values multiplied by the number of portables result in a
traffic capacity that has to be provided.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 34(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Minutes mErlang Minutes mErlang

per hour per hour
3 50 15 250
6 100 18 300
9 150 30 500
12 200 45 750

Example:
A customer ordering a system with 55 portable telephones estimates that each portable generates 200 mE traffic in
average. These values require a system with a traffic capacity of 11 E (0,2x55). With an accepted GOS of 0.5% the
number of IC-LUs is found as follows:
The total traffic is 11 E. In the column of 0.5% GOS, the next higher value of 11 E is 14.2 E, resulting in 3 IC-LUs.
So, the system shall be equipped with 3 IC-LUs, offering the client 14.4 E in stead of 11. This means that the sys-
tem has an over-capacity of 3.2 E, which allows expansion of the system with 16 portables without reducing the
Grade Of Service nor the need of more IC-LUs.
Thus 56 circuits with an accepted GOS of 0.5% result in a maximum traffic capacity of 41.2 E for the system.

6.2.1 Traffic Capacity of Base Stations

A Base Station, having 8 channels available, has an Erlang value of 2.7 with a GOS of 0.5%. This means that each
Base Station can serve 18 portables, assuming each portable generates 150 mE during busy hour or 13.5 portables
generating 200 mE each.
Example:
Assuming a full coverage in a building can be achieved with 4 Base Stations means that 55 portables generate to-
gether 55 x 0.200 = 11 E, while the Base Stations traffic capacity is only 4 x 2.7 = 10.8 Erlang. This is insufficient so
another Base Station in the area of the busiest part of the company has to be added.
Practically, the total capacity offered by the cordless network is generally more than sufficient, but this is from an av-
erage point of view. In certain places, traffic demands may vary such that locally the network is often blocked, or has
a lower GOS than required. For instance a purchase department may easily generate 300 mE per Portable during
busy hour, thus, when e.g. with 6 persons giving a very high load on the Base Station close by. It may be necessary
to add a Base Station in this area to have enough capacity for others to call as well. Also think of e.g. canteens during
lunch time etc.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 35(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.3 Board IC-CU (ROF 157 5128) (A-Protocol)

red
RP yellow
green
Start-up red
CPU Error state green RYS 102 528/2
T & M active green
RYS 102 528/1
ROF1575128/1
BS2 9627
IC-CU
R1A

FECU
(KDU 130 05/__)
ON Switch 1 in position OFF
disconnects the battery
for the RAM and DCT
1 2 clock

+
1

A C
TXM 18 RTS
0V 20 DTR
PRINTER
PORT RCV 22 DCD

n.c. 24 CTS
RYS 102 529/1

TXM 26 RTS RYS 102 527/1

0V 28 DTR
MAINTENANCE
PORT RCV 30 DCD
DSR 32 CTS

Note: When connecting the maintenance port to a modem for remote maintenance first connect the RASC cable to
the maintenance port and the other end to a 0-modem plug/cable and then to the modem.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 36(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.4 IC-CU2 (ROF 157 5131/_) (GAP-Protocol)

LEDs

RP error red Switch 1 and 2 must have the ON

Individual blocked yellow same position. ON (default)
Individual busy green 48V from the backplane. OFF
CPU error/DCT error log green activates external DC input and
SPU error red 1 2
disconnects the backplane.
CLU error red
DECT Sync port
RYS 102 531/1
SYNCH A IN
RYS 102 531/2
ON

SYNCH B IN

synchronization
DECT
SYNCH A OUT 0V
ROF1575131/1
BS2 9727
IC-CU2
R1A

SYNCH B OUT 0V

RYS 102 554/1

(KDU 130 05/__)
V0(-)
External power input
via front connector (to enable V1(+)
set switch 1and 2 to OFF) RYSNB 101 20

to power supply BML 351 048 TSR BS 101 12/1500

Express Power feeding to base stations

A C RYSNB 101 19
+

To BS 4 EPP(-) 18 EPP(+)
20
22
To BS 3 EPP(-) EPP(+) RYS 102 553/1

24
To BS 2 EPP(-) 26 EPP(+) RYSNB 101 23/2 remove paper
insulation
28
30 Maintenance port
To BS 1 EPP(-) EPP(+)
TXM 18 RTS
32
0V 20 DTR
Serial communication to base stations PRINTER
A C RCV 22 DCD PORT
02
To BS 4 SC0 SC1 n.c. 24 CTS
04 TXM 26 RTS
06 0V
To BS 3 SC0 SC1 28 DTR
08 MAINTENANCE
RCV 30 DCD PORT
10
To BS 2 SC0 SC1 DSR
12 32 CTS

14
To BS 1 SC0 SC1
16
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 37(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.5 Board IC-LU (ROF 157 5129)

Up to revision R2A

Speech reset active Red

Processing board not polled Red RYS NB 101 22/3
Unit board error Red
reset CLP Red
Cell Link Unit board not polled Red
board error and/or Red +
Base Station not initialized RYS NB 101 20
External power input V0(-)
via front connector
(to enable set switch 1 to ON) V1(+)
Set switch 1 to ON to
disconnect 48V feeding

2
ON
from the backplane and
R1A
ROF1575129/1
IC-SLU
BS2 9627

1
+

to power supply TSR BS 101 12/1500 enable feeding from front

BML 351 013 connector for all lines.
The IC-LU board can supply up to
1.5A to the Base Stations via the
Express Power feeding to base stations
A C
back plane. Higher currents have to
EPP (V0(-)) 02 EPP (V1(+)) be supplied via the front connector.
To BS 2
04
(V0(-)) 06
EPP EPP (V1(+))

08 To BS 1

+
Serial communication to base stations
A C
02
SC0 SC1 To BS 4
04
06 RYS NB 101 19
SC0 SC1 To BS 3
08
10
SC0 SC1 To BS 2
12
14
SC0 SC1 To BS 1
16

Note: Use only the cable (TSR BS 902 0001/__ or equivalent) for the wiring to the MDF.
External power input: This cable is used if the current of all Base Stations connected to the IC-LU exceeds 1.5A.
This cable connects either to another power supply in another cabinet or to the same cabinet’s power supply. The
current fed by this cable must also be considered in the power calculation of the BML 351 048.
Overvoltage Protection
All lines leading outside the building to Base Stations must be fitted with 90V gas-filled surge arresters between
every wire to ground.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 38(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.6 Board IC-LU (ROF 157 5129)

Revision R2A and higher

Speech

INT.
Processing board error Red

EXT.
1
Unit

Cell Link Unit board error and/or Red

Base Station not initialized

External power input V0(-)

via front connector (to enable RYS 102 554/1
set switch 1 and 2 to OFF) V1(+)
RYS NB 101 20
Set switch 1 and 2 to ON ON
to connect 48V feeding
R1A
ROF1575129/1
IC-SLU
BS2 9627

to power supply TSR BS 101 12/1500 RYS NB 101 19 from the backplane. The
BML 351 013 IC-LU board can supply 1 2
up to 1.5A to the Base
Stations via the back plane. Set
Express Power feeding to base stations
switch 1and 2 to OFF, if higher cur-
A C
EPP (V0(-)) 02 EPP (V1(+)) rents are needed. Connect exter-
To BS 2 nal power via the front connector.
04
EPP (V0(-)) 06 EPP (V1(+))
To BS 1
08

Serial communication to base stations

A C
02
SC0 SC1 To BS 4
04
06
SC0 SC1 To BS 3
08
10
SC0 SC1 To BS 2
12
14
SC0 SC1 To BS 1
16

Note: Use only the cable (TSR BS 902 0001/__ or equivalent) for the wiring to the MDF.
External power input: This cable is used if the current of all Base Stations connected to the IC-LU exceeds 1.5A.
This cable connects either to another power supply in another cabinet or to the same cabinet’s power supply. The
current fed by this cable must also be considered in the power calculation of the BML 351 048.
Overvoltage Protection
All lines leading outside the building to Base Stations must be fitted with 90V gas-filled surge arresters between
every wire to ground.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 39(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.7 Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_ and KRCNB 301 03/_)

The Base Station (BS) enables radio communication between the Integrated Cordless system and the portable
telephones. The communication via two 2B+D interfaces, requires two twisted pair cables. Both interfaces provide in
total eight 32 kbit/s speech paths between a BS and IC-LU, enabling a BS to handle eight simultaneous calls. The BS
is connected to the IC-CU2 or IC-LU via two wire pairs called serial communication wires (SC0 & SC1) carrying up to
8 simultaneous digital voice connections and the central power feeding. Apart from data communication these two
twisted pairs are also be used to distribute power to the BSs. Two additional pairs can be wired to provide a greater
powering range. There are three methods to power BSs:
1. centrally via backplane (with or without EPP)
2. centrally via external input (with / w.o EPP)
3. via local power supply (optional).
With the first and second methods power is distributed via the IC-LU to the BS. The cable length between BS and
IC-LU depends on the number wires used for power feeding, the type of cable and environmental noise. In the third
case (local feeding), BSs are powered by an AC-adapter or another power source which is not routed via the cabinet.
The number of BSs used in a system depends on the area to be covered and the traffic density. Typical in-house
coverage is up to 30 meter radius. In practice the cell size may vary between 10 meters indoors in worst case situations,
up to 300 meters outdoor in free space.
The BS has two main functions:
• to modulate a carrier with the digital encoded information (TDMA frame directed to portable)
• to demodulate a modulated carrier (TDMA frame received from portable).
A special cover (KRY NB 101 01) is available to mount the BS (KRCNB 201 03) outdoors providing splash proof
housing and water tight sealings for the wiring.

6.7.1 Base Station Planning

The major task when providing a wireless service is to estimate the number of BSs and to find their most suitable
location. A number of factors tend to limit the range of a BS like the materials the wall is composed of or the location
and size of machines, furniture, air-conditioning systems, elevators etc. This results in unexpected reflections or
absorption of radio waves. Generally BSs should not be located on outer walls, except if the outdoor area has to be
covered as well, as this reduces the area actually covered. All of these unpredictable influencing factors makes it
extremely difficult to define rules for how to cover an area with a suitable number of BSs. In difficult environments the
use of a site survey tool (LTT NB 101 01/_) is recommended.
Establish a Base Station plan for the installation site to determine the best location for the BSs.
Base Station aerial range
• In an office environment in a steel concrete building up to 30 m in diameter can be covered and including,
under normal conditions, the neighbouring floors.
• Production halls up to 200 m in diameter are covered but ranges can be less if bulky machines, cranes
etc. are part of the interior.
• Outdoor ranges can be up to 300m.
When installing a BS, position it, then walk around to determine cell coverage area either by listening to the speech
quality - whether mutes or crackling sounds are heard in the portable - or measure the RQI indicator using the portables
Service Display facility (see FAULT TRACING 1545-ASB15002Uen).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 40(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Ground floor corridor

intermediate 16m
floor

Base
Station 1
3,5m

e.g. 40m

6.7.2 Base Stations Cabling

Using a four-pair cable or more-pair cable, the free cable pairs can be used as additional power wires (EPP) to increase
the feeding distance and reduce overall power consumption (by reducing the ohmic resistance) to the BS. The BSs
can also be powered by an on-site adapter (refer to section 6.7.7 ).
Connection of serial communication wires and EPP lines is polarity-independent. SC0-0 and SC0-1 may be
interchanged but SC0-x and SC1-x may not be interchanged. The diagram below shows the wiring principle to each
base station connected to the IC-CU2 or IC-LU.
Power feeding of the Base Station
There are three alternatives to power feed (-48V) the Base Station:
• The power feeding can be taken via the IC-CU2 or IC-LU from the back plane in the cabinet. The
DIP-switch on the IC-LU is set to OFF.
• From an external power source via the front connector on the IC-CU2 or IC-LU (≤56V). Note the
polarity on the input (see drawing of IC-CU2 or IC-LU board). The switch on the IC-CU2 or IC-LU
is set to ON.
• By an AC-adapter (see page 45). The switch on the IC-CU2 and IC-LU should be set to ON but
no power feeding from the external power source via the front connector on the IC-LU.

SC0-a
-48V from V0- 48V external
source
backplane V1+ SC0-b
(optional)
S1 & 2 SC1-a
+ DC
Data/power
SC1-b
connector 1 DC
SC0-a -
EPPa
up to 2 power pairs "EPP
carrying V0- and V1+
CLC x +T EPPb
SC0-b
(one of 4 SC1-a
or 8)
+T SC0-a
SC1-b
EPPa SC0-b
Data/power
connector 2SC1-a
EPPb
available only on
Base Station SC1-b
KRC NB 301 01/_
IC-LU or IC-CU2 EPPa
Base Station KRC NB 201 03/_
EPPb
and KRC NB 301 01/_
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 41(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.7.3 Base station cable delay measurement

After all base stations have been installed, the cable delays must be measured in order to program the base station
delays into the system at initialization time. On IC-LUs with the revision R1D and higher and IC-CU2 revision R1C or
higher automatic delay measurement is performed. In this case no measurement is needed but using the cordless
system manager (CSM) go to the menu "add Base Station" and enter a "1" in the field "delay".
Base station delays are measured at the radio exchange with an echo-meter connected to cable data pair SC0 or SC1
and with the cable open ended at both sides. So the cable must be disconnected from the IC-LU or IC-CU2 as well
as the base station.
1. Make sure that the base station cable is unplugged from the base station and the relevant connector on
the relevant IC-LU or IC-CU2.
2. Connect an echo-meter to cable pair SC0 or SC1.
3. Measure the cable delay. The measured delay is the time between sending a pulse down the line and
receiving the echo. Therefore the recorded value is twice the cable delay and must be halved. The
resulting value must have an accuracy of 200 ns (corresponding with 20 – 30 m).
4. Record on paper the delay value measured for each base station in microseconds, together with the
base station number.
5. Repeat the delay measurement for all base stations.
6. Re-connect the connectors to the IC-LU or IC-CU2.
Another possibility is measuring the ohmic resistance:
Connect to SC0 or SC1 measure the resistance of the loop and divide the result by 3,3. This is the value to be entered
at system initialization in the Cordless System Manager.
This formula applies for wires of 0.5 mm diameter. After all lines to the Base Stations have been measured, connect
the Base Stations by plugging-in the connector.

6.7.4 Ranges on cables

The following ranges are given for base stations connected to an IC-CU2 and IC-LU. Depending on the cable type
ranges depend on noise levels imposed on the cables. The values stated are maximum achievable ranges:

Type Cable Maximum cable length

Wire diameter (∅) Capacitance Superimposed noise

8 mV/pHz 10 mV/pHz

Twisted pair 0.4 mm 45 nF/km 1.2 km 1.0 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 45 nF/km 1.6 km 1.4 km

Twisted pair 0.5 mm 120 nF/km 0.9 km 0.8 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 45 nF/km 1.9 km 1.7 km

Twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.1 km 1.0 km

Double twisted pair 0.6 mm 120 nF/km 1.0 km 0.9 km

(J-Y (St)Y 2×2×0.6)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 42(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.7.5 Base Station (KRC NB 203 01/_)

The Base Station (BS) is supplied with a drilling template to mount the unit and 2 antennas with TNC connectors.
Mount the unit in a suitable location to provide the best communication coverage.
Use the supplied drilling template and mount the BS with four screws (6 mm Φ). Complete the electrical connection
according to the above drawing. Do not connect to the Base station yet.
IF power is supplied by the adapter (BMLNB 101 04), the screw/slide connector must be used. The serial
communication wires can be connected via the modular jack or the screw/slide connector. A screw with a bundling
cord holder is provided for traction relief to the left of the connection field.The BS starts up if the supply lines deliver
more than 12 VDC.

LEDs

Status of LEDs Meaning

Power LED on (green) BS power on
Reset LED on (red) Power Fail/Reset
TNC connector
LED1 and LED2 on or BS in non
LED1 and LED2 flashing operational mode
Mounting
holes (4x) LED1 and LED2 off BS operational (no traffic)
LED1 off and LED2 on BS operational (traffic)
LED1 on and LED2 off Fatal software error
LED 2
Power

LED 1
Reset

X52 X51
1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
or screw/slide
modular jack connector
EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)

EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b

Use connectors 5 & 6 for AC adapter

nc
nc

nc
nc

connection. This input is insensitive to

polarity reversal

Note: ) If the Base Station (KRC NB 201 03/_) is accessible by persons other than trained personnel mount the cover
(SDFNB 101101/_ or similar.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 43(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.7.6 Base Station (KRCNB 301 03/_)

LED2

Front view Rear view

8 pin
LED1 modular plug
EPP(v0)
EPP(v1)
SC1-a
SC0-a
SC0-b
SC1-b
nc
nc

SC = Serial Channel
EPP = Express Power Pair Factory testing Data/power Data/power
6 pin modular plug
NC = Not connected
The BS is connected to the radio exchange by means of a standard twisted pair cable. The BS is can be fixed to a
wall, a ceiling, a pole or a beam, by means of the mounting bracket included. When fixing the BS to a wall or ceiling
the included plugs and screws must be used. When fixing it to a pole or beam a (not included) strap or a flexible metal
band must be used.
Connectors
• Two 8-pin modular jacks for data and powering
• A 6-pin modular jack for factory testing
The two data/powering connectors are interconnected on the board.
LEDs
LED 1: Green power LED
LED 2: Three colour LED, see table below

Status of LED2 Meaning

Off Base station operational and no traffic on the base station
Green Base station operational and traffic on the base station
Red Base station is malfunctioning
Amber Base station is OK, but not available (self-test, not initialized,
no communication with radio exchange)
Flashing green All 8 channels are in use
Flashing amber Software is being downloaded to the base station
The BSs can be mounted vertically or horizontally. Mount the BSs at places and positions as determined in the system
configuration plan. The BS must be placed so that it is not facing large metal objects such as large heating pipes,
machines.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 44(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Fixing the mounting bracket to a wall

Fix the mounting bracket (see figure below) to the wall as follows:
1. Hold the mounting bracket with its flat side against the wall such that the text ‘TOP’ is the right way up,
and mark the two holes. The minimum distance between the upper hole and the ceiling or any object
above the BS must be as least 65 mm. If the distance is less than 65 mm, the BS cannot be slid onto
the bracket.
2. When using wall plugs, take a ∅ 6 mm drill and drill the two holes and insert the included wall plugs.
3. Position the mounting bracket with its flat side to the wall and fasten it with the two included ∅ 3.5 mm
screws.

Ceiling

≥ 65 mm

TOP

Fixing the mounting bracket to a pole or beam

The mounting bracket can be attached to a pole (diameter ≥ 45 mm) or a beam (wider than 50 mm) by means of a
strap or flexible metal band less than 30 mm wide. Position the mounting bracket to a pole or a beam so that the text
‘TOP’ is right way up. The strap or flexible metal band must be purchased locally.

Tied wrongly
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 45(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Cable ducts

When the BS is mounted to the wall, cable ducts can

be used to route the wiring through.
• Fix the cable duct to the wall in one of the
positions shown in the left figure.
65 mm
• For safety reasons secure the BS cable to a
57 mm
TOP convenient point at about 30 cm from the base
station.
If for some reason the BS drops, the cable is pulled
out of the base station.

125 mm

15 mm thick cable ducts

75 mm 70 mm

Mounting the Base Station

1. Hold the BS flat against the mounting bracket and move it downwards until it clicks.

Note: After completion of the installation, base stations must be initialized using the cordless system manager.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 46(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

6.7.7 Power Feeding of Base Stations

When using any of the adapters mentioned below care must be taken to configure the IC-CU2 boards for local BS
feeding. If the BSs are to be fed locally the remote power feeding switch on the boards should be set to the position
disconnecting the feeding from the back plane and no external feeding to the board should be connected.
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 201 03/_)
An AC-adapter to feed the BS locally is available for 230VAC/24VDC (BMLNB 101 04) for all European countries ex-
cept for the UK and Cyprus. In other countries it has to be purchased locally and must meet the specifications given
below:
Output voltage: between 12 V and 56VDC
Output power 7.5W minimum
Adapter for Base Station (KRCNB 301 03/_)
The 24 VDC adapter (BMLNB 101 09/n) is fitted with a 8-pin modular plug that can be plugged into one of the data/
power connectors of the base station.

6.7.8 Software upgrade

If necessary, the software in the BS can be updated by downloading new software to the BS. Downloading can be
performed without disconnecting the BS. The new software is stored in flash memory.

7 LINE NETWORK
The line network for PBX-extensions is to be installed in accordance with the stipulations for standard telephone
networks. Twisted pair cables must be used for the lines and a wire diameter 0.5 mm is recommended in order to
reach full line length, i.e. 800 m.
No stubs and/or branches may exist on a digital extension lines, as they could cause transmission
problems. This does not apply for ISDN configurations.
• The network lines are to be connected directly to the boards with prefabricated cables which are equipped with
EURO-connectors for 4 wire-pairs
• In those cases where a separate ERICSSON MDF has been installed, prefabricated cables are used between
the MDF and board connectors in the exchange cabinet.
These cables have EURO-connectors mounted at one end for connection to the board
To connect the ELU-A, ELU-D, MFU, BTU-A, BTU-C and BTU-E to MDF, use cable:
• TSR 902 0444/1 (length = 1.5 m) is terminated with standard ERICSSON connectors
• TSR 902 0472/3 (length = 6 m) is equipped with connector only at the exchange side
• TSR 901 0472/2 (length = 15 m) is equipped with connector only at the exchange side
For connection of BTU-D, use cable:
• TSR 225 1304/20000, 75 Ω coaxial cable
• use the cable TSR 902 0444/1 for 120 Ω connection or a double shielded cable TSR 901 0481/20000 (adhere
to local requirements).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 47(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

7.1 Cables for BDV 113 08

7.1.1 MDF cables

Krone

R-state
Factory Year-W-D

C
A B

a02 a10
colour: wt bl wt or wt gn wt br rd bl rd or rd gn rd br
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 5 ind. 6
(bl) b (or) b (bl) b (or) b
A B a b a b a b a b a b a b a
(wt) a (wt) a (rd) a (rd) a 1 2 3 4 5 6
ind. 3 ind. 4 ind. 7 ind. 8
(gn) b (br) b (gn) b (br) b
ind.1 ind.2 etc. slotting side
wire wrap side

ERICSSON MDF bar

C
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
C
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
A B
connections see above
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 8
Open ends
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

A B
connections see above
length a

part number a usege Cable with 8 pairs, mounted with:

TSR BS 902 0001/800 800 mm standard cable for integrated MDF
ERICSSON plug and Krone bar.
/1500 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF
/3000 3000 mm MDF cable for existing MDF
TSR 902 0444/1 1500 mm standard cable for external MDF ERICSSON plug and ERICSSON MDF
TSR 902 0444/2 3000 mm standard cable for external MDF distribution bar
TSR 901 0472/3 6000 mm for external MDF, 120Ω for BTU-D ERICSSON plug
TSR 901 0472/2 15000 mm standard cable for external MDF and open ends
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 48(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

7.1.2 Cable for ELU-C

length a

R-state
C

Factory Year-W-D
B

A (B)
1 a
b ind. 1(6)
a
b ind. 2(7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
a
C
A&B b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
a
b
a
10 b ind. 5(10)
ind. 1 ind. 2 ind. 10

part number a usege

RPM 603 337/1 1500mm standard cable for ERICSSON MDF

length a

A
R-state
Factory Year-W-D

part number a usege

383 718/3 3000mm standard cable for ERICSSON MDF
RPM 603 310/15000 15000mm standard cable for ERICSSON MDF
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 49(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

7.1.3 Coax cable for BTU-D

B
length a

part number a usege

TSR 225 1304/20000 20000mm coax cable 75 Ω for BTU-D

7.1.4 V.24 cables

only on TSR 902 0466

13 1

25 14

C
A
B
length a

TXD A02 TXD 2

A02 C02 A02 3
0V
A04 0V 7 A04 7
RTS C02 RTS 4
C02 5
A04 C04 DTR
A C04 DTR 6 C04 20

A06 C06 C A06 RXD 2

C A06 RXD 3
CTS C08 CTS 5
C08 4
C06 DCD 8
c06
A08 C08 A08 DSR 20 A08 DSR 6

Wiring of cables: TSR 902 0476 Wiring of cable: TSR 902 0466
TSR 902 0448

part number a usege

TSR 902 0448/1 5000mm cable connecting a PC to CPU-D_/AUX

TSR 902 0466/1 5000mm cable connecting a modem to CPU-D_/AUX
TSR 902 0476/1 5000mm cable connecting a printer to CPU-D_/AUX
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 50(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

7.1.5 Exchange power cables

Factory Year-W-D
R-state
length a

part number a usege

TRE 990 113/850 850mm exchange power cable

TRE 990 113/1500 1500mm exchange power cable

7.1.6 IC-LU power cable

B

Factory Year-W
R-state-D

length a

part number a usege

TSR BS 101 12/1500 1500mm IC-LU power cable

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 51(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

7.1.7 Mains power cables

Cable for EUROPE

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 323 2500mm mains power cable 230V 10A

Cable for Brazil, Mexico, Venezuela etc.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 324 2500mm mains power cable 125V 10A

Cable for U.K.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 326 2500mm mains power cable 250V 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 52(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

Cable for Australia, New Zealand, China etc.

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 311 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Italy, Chile

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 313 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

Cable for Denmark

length a

part number a usege

RPM 945 327 2500mm mains power cable 250VAC 10A

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 53(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

8 MARKING OF CABLES 9 INSTALLATION OF MDF

(Main Distribution Frame)
Each cable that is connected to a PBX type ASB 150
should be marked on the cable’s designation holder
with the label set SVH 277 003/4, supplied for this
9.1 Integrated MDF SXK 106 4208/1
purpose. The cable TSR 902 0444/1 is supplied with a
designation holder, 860 1839, at the EURO-connector.
The integrated MDF is used for an add-on installation
mounted at the bottom of the cabinet.
Label 2: BDV 113 08
BTU_

Placing of PBA
03

in PBX
01 2 34
2
Label 1:
6* 2

Type of PBA

Label 3:
Position of pin earth
contact unit connection
on PBA to cabinet
4
1st
1/4
Front side of
designation 2nd SXA BS 101 0024
holder on cable 1/4
to PBA 3rd
1/4
6
4th
KRONE bar holder
1/4

This label set contains three label types:

KRONE bar with connection cable
Label 1: This label indicates the abbreviated name TSR BS 902 0001/800
for the PBA to which the cable is to be
connected.
Example of parameter: BTU_

Label 2: There is one 2-digit parameter. Using the supplied screws and nuts the MDF should
This parameter indicates the position of be installed in the manner shown above. The bolts at
the PBA-slot in the PBA where the cable the back allows the MDF to tilt down for service access
is to be connected. to the back of the cabinet.
Example of parameter: 03 Two KRONE bar holders can be installed, each ac-
commodating up to ten KRONE bars. The front holder
Label 3 There are two 1-digit parameters.
should preferably be used for trunk lines as it can addi-
The first parameter indicates the position
tionally accommodate the cartridge containing the gas
of the pin-contact unit on the PBA.
discharge tubes for protection against lightning. Sec-
The second parameter indicates the 1/4
tion 3.4 refers to the mandatory ground connection.
of the pin contact.
When using this MDF the earth wire should first be
Example of parameters: 6* 2 connected to the exchange cabinet and then continue
down to the integrated MDF. The earth connection on
These three labels indicate where the upper part of the
the MDF is located in the same position as on the cab-
cable is to be connected and are placed on the front
inet. The screw (earth connection) on the front row bar
side of the designation holder.
holder must be fastened securely when the gas dis-
When the label 1 for PBA has a "_" included in the charge tubes are mounted.
name, please enter the correct letter with a marker
pen.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 54(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

9.2 External MDF SXK 106 4139/1 9.3 Line network

Unpack the MDF cabinet and remove its front cover. Place the cables according to the figure.
Mount the MDF cabinet on its designated position.
Secure the cables to the MDF cabinet with the adhe-
Take into consideration the normal working height
sive anchors and cable fastener.
above the floor (about 1.30 m to the lower edge of the
MDF cabinet) and the length (1.5 m) of prefabricated NOTE: There must be a connection to earth for the
cable MDF cabinet when surge protectors are
TSR 902 0444/1. installed.
Overall dimensions
of the MDF cabinet: 295x184x68 (HxWxD in mm).
Alternative
connections
Cables from of cables to
Mounting of MDF cabinet line network board
147 mm
228 mm

Earth
connection
1 Loosen cover only by hand force
(there are no holding screws) Primarily intended
for trunkline use
2 Mark mounting holes for MDF cabinet Alternative (with surge protectors)
connections
of cables from Cable for board
3 Drill and insert plugs line network connection:
(Use enclosed screws and plugs) TSR 902 0444/1

4 Mount MDF cabinet and screw it

securely into position
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 55(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

10 INSTALLATION OF FILTER BOX (BDV 113 31) WITH BE12/16, CALL

METERING FILTER BOARD (ROA 219 5110/1, -/2), MOUNTED
Mount the FILTER BOX (BDV 113 31) on the wall, just as the MDF under section 11.2.
Installation of BE12/16 is to be made as shown in the figure below.
If surge protectors are installed, the FILTER BOX must be connected to earth.

ASB 150 02
BDV 113 08
MDF
Filter box Board position: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SXK 106 4139/1
BDV 113 31
(ERICSSON)
Earth connection

ELU-_
BTU-A

BTU-_

alternative 1
with standard ERICSSON MDF
connection bars
TSR 902 0444/1 = 1.5 m
a -/2 = 3.0 m b TSR 252 0201/1600 (1600 mm)
alternative 2
open ends for any MDF
TSR 901 0472/1 = 3.0 m
-/2 = 15.0 m
-/3 = 6.0 m

Mount the FILTER BOX (BDV 113 31) on the wall, just as the MDF under section 11.2.
Installation of BE12/16 is to be made as shown in the figure below.
If surge protectors are installed, the FILTER BOX must be connected to earth.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 56(57)
Prepared Subject responsible Documentnumber
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Doc respons/Approved Checked Date Rev File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

11 Door Interface Unit (DIU) sounds loud and clear enough other wise repeat the
procedure.
(BFY BS 10101/1)
• No voice connection to the speaker of the
Installation: telephone.Turn the mic potentiometer screw two
turns clock wise. Speak into the door phone
The DIU is an interface connected via one or two ex- microphone and verify that it is heard in the hand set
tension lines to the ELU-A of the exchange and via a of the telephone otherwise repeat again.
set of wires to the door phone. The DIU should be
mounted indoors on a dry wall. The door phone can be Settings on the board
of any commercially available type as long as it meets
the requirements listed in the 1555-ASB15002Uen OPENER
SYSTEM OVERVIEW under section 7 Technical Data 8 sec
6 sec Ext. B x17
for DIU. K1
4 sec
1 sec TO
D TIMEOUT Extension
Connection: 3 min B (door
2 min opener)
use cable diameter ≥0.6mm 1 min

The wires to the speaker and microphone should be (lead directly to door opener C
button if already wired)
led via two twisted pairs in a separate cable. Caution
x12 DO TO
when connecting a polarity-dependant microphone. Extension
Check polarity on connector x1. Make the connections A (voice)
Ext. A x18
to the door bell button, door opener and key lights etc DIU (BFY BS 101 01)
in another cable. This is to minimise disturbances on Microphone sensitivity
the microphone line. The wires to the door opener level setting

carry more current and should have a diameter greater Mic

A B
than 0.6 mm. The length between door phone and DIU
Loudspeaker
should be less than 50 m. The length between door LS MIC
+ - - Volume BELL
phone and exchange should be less than 500m. x2 x1 x5
+
The connector X18 is used for speech connection be-
tween DIU and exchange. The connector X17 is used
to activate the door opener. If the door opener wiring
already exists the X17 connection can be omitted and spkr mic
the connection X12 leads to an existing button. door
door phone bell button
Pressing the door phone button (connection X5) acti-
vates the DIU and the programmed extension rings door
(see Facility Description 15534-ASB15002Uen). The opener
interface stays active for the preset time selected un- mains 8...48VAC
der "C" and shuts off after this time has elapsed.
Transformer

11.0.1 Adjustments of DIU Microphone connection with polarity dependent

A
6 VDC supply for microphones with amplifiers.
The microphone level is factory set, but under certain
conditions the line attenuation can exceed expectations B The loudspeaker volume level is factory set. To
adjust turn the Loudspeaker potentiometer.
resulting only in one way speech connection or clipping
of the voice between extension and door phone. In this C Timeout for the interface to shut off. The jumper se-
case cautious change of microphone level setting has lects intervals between 1...2...3 minutes.
to be performed. The potentiometers range is D Set door opener activation time 1...4...6...8 sec.
• If the voice in the speaker of the door phone sounds
too dim or is clipped, turn the mic potentiometer
screw two turns counter clockwise. Speak into the
telephone microphone and verify that the speaker
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 57(57)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BDV 113 08 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 V

12 INSTALLATION OF ALARM INTERFACE UNIT

Line to exchange
a

DBY BS 410 01/1

nc ba a b bb nc

line to exchange

ba and bb are the

connectors to the
alarm button
nc are not used wires

wall outlet
a RPM BS 130 002/01
connect to the line input on the telephone

Line/Alarm (to wall outlet) Line out (to telephone) Optional Alarm

1 1 1
6-pin 4-pin 4-pin
modular jack modular jack modular jack
Pin Description Pin Description Pin Description
1 not used 1 not used 1 button a
2 button a 2 a 2 not used
3 a 3 b 3 not used
4 b 4 not used 4 button b
5 button b
6 not used

The ALARM INTERFACE UNIT is an optional equipment mounted in the case bottom of the DBC 21x telephones.
This equipment is used in the hospitality area to enable distress notification from e.g. a bathroom. A normally closed
switch is installed and the two terminals are connected to the pins (button a and button b) on the option unit. The con-
nection can be made in the wall outlet. Then the wiring shown above applies. If another type of wiring is used the
connector Optional alarm can be used.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
SEA/EBBMP Stangelberger EBBX/F 1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
SEA/EBBMP 1999-07-15 C ASB 150 02
Database reference
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen-1-C.emf

POWER SUPPLY WITH

BATTERY CHARGER

BML BS 101 01/_

Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 Installation Of The Battery Case
(SDD BS 102 001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.2 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . 5
4.3 Installation of battery backup
6,3A T
with greater capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 250V

4.4 Installation with an

external DC source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.5 Setting the charging voltage . . . . . . . 6
4.6 Changing the battery fuse . . . . . . . . 6
5 ALARM CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . 7
6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . . 8
7 ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.1 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7.2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

1 GENERAL
This document covers the installation and replacement of the power supply with battery charger BML BS 101 01/_
and the installation of the battery backup unit.
The power supply unit with battery charger is available in 2 different mains versions:
• for 230 VAC...........BML BS 101 01/1
• for 115 VAC...........BML BS 101 01/2

For more information of power calculation examples, see document INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
(1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen).
The power supply unit supplies the exchange cabinet and a battery backup with power at the same time, provided
that the total output power (2,1 A on 48V) of the power supply unit is not exceeded.
The power supply unit is mounted within the cabinet BDV BS 101 05 and BDV BS 101 01.
If initially an exchange with battery backup is ordered, the unit is preconfigured with a power supply with battery
charger.The batteries are delivered separately and have to be installed according to this installation instruction.
In order to install the alarm feature, the CPU-D (ROF 157 5118/1) must have revision R1A/A or higher. CPU-D/2
(ROF 157 5118/2) must have revision R1A or higher. The CPU-D4 (ROF 157 5124/_) must have revision R1A or
higher.

2 UNPACKING
Verify with the ordering list that the delivery is complete. The power supply unit BML BS 101 01/_ can be delivered
separately or together with batteries, battery case and the cable set necessary to install a battery pack.
The mains cord is not part of the BML BS 101 01/_. Use the cord already installed in the exchange. The mains cord
is ordered as an individual item, in order to fit each individual market.
Unpack the 4 batteries, the battery case and the power supply unit. Make sure no parts have been damaged or have
become loose during transport. Check each battery’s voltage (12.5V - 12.9V) to make sure they are charged and
operational.
Check the DC battery cables for insulation breaks before installing. Short circuits can be hazardous and cause fire.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

3 LOCATIONS

A: Power switch does not disconnect the unit from

(D)
mains. This switch only shuts down the unit to standby.
(B)
B & C: are screws required for mounting the power
Battery cable
supply unit (screw (C) is only for BDV BS 101 01).
connector (E) 6,3A T
250V

Fuse (G)
D: this is the DC supply cable to the exchange.
E: battery cable connection (reverse polarity protected)
Alarm cable
Lable
connector (F) F: alarm cable connection leading to the internal MDF
where they are connected to the I/O cable of the CPU-D.
Power switch (A)
Standby only G: fuse: see section 4.6 for replacement.

battery charging
voltage adjustment
(for authorized
personnel only)

(C)

Ground
Mains power cord plug
IEC 320 C17
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

4 INSTALLATION

4.1 Installation Of The Battery Case (SDD BS 102 001)

1 If the system is already installed and

running, inform the customer that
your work is going to stop his ex-
change for a while.
2 Choose a suitable location for the SWIVEL-
battery case. Do not mount the SHELF
battery case above the exchange. PSU
Mark the holes on the wall and drill.
Fit the holes with wall plugs.
MAKE SURE THE BATTERY CABINET
IS 100% SECURED TO THE WALL, AS Fuse Mount case with screws
THE BATTERIES ARE HEAVY.
3 Use the battery cable set Battery cable
(NTM BS 101 28) for making the connector
Battery case
connections in the battery case SDD BS 102 001
according to the drawing below.
Insert the batteries with the correct
polarity according to the markings Part of NTM BS 101 28
on the battery case sides. Attach the Open cabinet cover
grey cables to the battery no. 1.
Make the (+) connection to the
battery no. 2 and put both batteries
into the case. Lead the grey cable (-) to the back and connect this cable directly to the battery no. 3
installed above. The gray coloured cables must be led in the shortest possible way on the front and back
side.
4 Connect the battery cable to the battery case (4 pole connector refer to drawing above) and put the front
cover on the battery case and fasten the screws.
5 With the supplied two screws mount the battery case on the wall. Two holes are provided in the cover to
access the screws. Make sure the screws are tightened securely.
6 Remove the front cover from the exchange cabinet. Before switching off the exchange please check that
the green LEDs on the extension boards are off (no traffic), then turn off the power switch (A).
7 Remove the DC supply cable (D) to the swivel shelf and unplug the mains cable from the wall outlet and
at the bottom of the power supply unit. Then remove the screw (B) at the top and turn the bottom screw
(C) two turns counter clockwise (the screw (C) applies only in cabinet BDV BS 101 01). Push up the power
supply unit and turn it completely to the right, disengage the unit on the left side wall and pull it out.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

black & red

wires

grey

3
1

4
2

8 Install the power supply with battery charger in the reverse procedure as described in position 7 of this
chapter. Switch on the power supply. Measure the battery DC voltage on the battery cable connector to
verify proper connections.
9 The reading should be within 50 - 54 V for good batteries. To prevent arching never connect the battery
unit until the power supply unit has powered up (please observe the power supply has a startup delay of
8 seconds). Connect the battery cable to the power supply unit (E).
10 Connect the power supply alarm cable to the four-pin outlet (F) on the PSU and connect the free ends
to an appropriate position on the KRONE connector bar where the I/O cable connection to the alarm input
on the CPU-D_ is made. See section 5 for alarm connection.
11 If this is a new installation, start-up the system according to the document t START OF OPERATION
(1537-ASB 150 02).
12 The battery case is equipped with a fuse. This part has the ERICSSON ordering number NGH 258 03/
630. This fuse is required to prevent a short circuit on the supply cables which might cause a fire.
13 Attach label: LZFBS 083 013/3L03 on the bottom of the cabinet. Refer to INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
(1531-BDV BS 101 05 Uen).
14 Put the front cover on the cabinet frame.
15 Remove all old excess material and inform the customer that the system is up and running.

4.2 BATTERY REPLACEMENT

The batteries (BKC BS 101 01/1) 4 pieces, for the integrated battery pack SDD BS 102 001 have to be ordered sep-
arately. If the system is operating on mains, the batteries can be replaced during operation. The objective is to mini-
mise arching of the battery cable plug during plugging and unplugging. This condition is met only during presence of
48 V DC on the power supply unit.
The battery type to be used is a maintenance free lead acid accumulator with a capacity of 2 Ah and a minimum
current charging capability of 3 A.
NOTE: Batteries are a threat to the environment and should be handled with great care.
Used batteries should be taken care of by specialists for recycling. Please contact the supplier
in this respect. Make sure they get them!
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

4.3 Installation of battery backup with greater capacity

Should a higher battery capacity be necessary, please contact the vendor for details. The battery must be capable of
handling a charging current of 3A. The battery must be of lead acid type.
The external batteries must be installed in a separate housing. As the gases are explosive take care of a good
ventilation to the outside to keep vapours from seeping into hazardous areas.
To protect against fire in case of short circuit, install an additional circuit breaker with switch. This is useful to prevent
arching on the DC connector (E) of the power supply when removing and inserting the plugs of the battery cable.

4.4 Installation with an external DC source

If there is no mains supply provided, the system can also be run on an external DC source e.g. large utilities. The in-
put voltage range is 44....54 V DC. The installation must provide a circuit breaker (CB) capable of switching currents
in excess of 150 A DC.
This is mandatory to prevent hazardous fires.
In this case a separate cable (TSR BS 101 10/2000) is required to connect the DC source. This cable inhibits the lock
on discharged batteries. This cable must not be used for larger battery backups.

DC connector (E)

4.5 Setting the charging voltage CB

The power supply unit is equipped with a potentiometer to

adjust the battery charging voltage. PSU
This potentiometer is factory set
Any change in the setting may only be done by authorised
personnel as it might reduce battery life. The battery
(BKC BS 101 01/1) used has a trickle charging voltage of external battery
54.5V DC, so this is the maximum output voltage delivered on or ext. DC source
the (E) connector. If an external battery with greater capacity BMLBS10101
should be connected instead, the charging voltage setting
must comply with the demands of the battery manufacturer.
CB = circuit breaker 6,3 A T / >150 A cutoff
capability, should also function as a switch
4.6 Changing the battery fuse

The battery fuse is accessible from the front of the unit. Replace it only by a fuse with the ERICSSON ordering
number
NGH 258 03/630
Ask your local supplier for details.

This fuse meets the requirement of cutting off a DC current in excess of 150 A. This is a mandatory requirement to
prevent hazardous fires.
NOTE: Always disconnect the battery supply cable before changing the fuse.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

5 ALARM CONNECTION
For connection of the ALARM input to indicate that the system
is running on battery power, use an ERICSON standard MDF Connector CPU-D
I/O cable or if an MDF is already equipped use a cable with CPU-D/_
a
open ends to make the alarm connection.
b
Should the system be already using some of the system fea- a
2
tures, (MUSIC input, ALARM output or TEMPERATURE SEN- b
SORS), this cable has already been installed. a ab
b
On the CPU-D, the connection is provided in field 6 CD,EF. On a
YELLOW
the CPU-D/_, the connections are provided on field 4 EF,GH. b
BLUE cd
a
If the connection is to be done directly to the front of the
CPU-D, CPU-D/_ board, use cable e.g. TSR 901 0472/3
b ef
a
(open ends and 6m long) and connect the most positive wire b
(YELLOW) to pin C14 on CPU-D and pin C22 on CPU-D/_. a
gh
The most negative (BLUE) is to be connected to pin C16 on b
CPU-D and to pin C24 on CPU-D/_. Use the connection field a
6 on the CPU-D and the connection field 4 on CPU-D/_. b
a
b use last two
a positions 4
CPU-D/_ Most
b
e.g. ROF 157 5124/_ positive ab
(0 V)
A BC Power supply
18
20 CPU-D_ cd
A 22 22 A BC
24 18
26 20 ef
28 22
30 24
32 26
28 gh
30
32
+12V
Most
negative
MDF (-48 V)
RELAY
Most 6
positive
(0 V) ab
to external
b
a
b
a
b
a
b

A BC
load 10
12
14 cd
The above figure shows an example for a 2 wire connection 16
18
for the alarm input and the alarm output connection. 20
22 ef
24
CPU-D
Most oh
Common i/o cable negative
e.g. w. open ends (-48 V)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(8)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML BS 101 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1999-07-15 C

6 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

The following supply cables are required for a complete

BATTERY CABINET
installation of an exchange with battery backup:
a b

POWER SUPPLY
EXCHANGE
a DC power supply cable from the power supply to the
exchange.
b Battery power cable with 6-pin connector and a 4-pin
connector. This cable is part of the battery-cable-set
NTM BS 101 28
c Common I/O cable e.g. TSR 901 0472/3 or
TSR BS 902 0001/xxxxx
d 2-pole power supply alarm cable TRE 990 112/3000 or e
the cable supplied with cable set NTM BS 101 28
c d
e Mains cord (see 1531-BDV 101 05 sect. 8.1). This cord
set must be approved by the local authorities in the
country where it is to be used. The plug (type IEC 320
C13) must be right angular for the connection to the
power supply unit and moulded to the cord.

MDF
7 ACCESSORIES

7.1 Fuse

ERICSSON ordering number NGH 258 03/630.

7.2 Batteries

The batteries for this exchange must comply to:

ERICSSON product No. BKC BS 101 01/1
VOLTAGE: 12 V
CAPACITY: minimum 2 Ah
TYPE: maintenance-free
SIZE: L=178 mm H=60 mm W=34 mm
WEIGHT: approx. 0,93 kg
Representative types: VARTA CF 12-2,0
Onr.56 220 706 063
Hitachi HP2-12
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
SEA/TB/MP Stangelberger SEA/TB/XF 1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
SEA/TB/MP 98-11-20 G ASB 150
Database reference
1531-BML 351 013 Uen-1-G.emf

POWER SUPPLY & 8.2 ASB 150 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . 10
BATTERY CHARGER 10 BATTERY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10.1 Integrated battery unit . . . . . . . . . . 10
BML 351 013/1, -2, -5, -6 10.2 Battery cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

10 BATTERY BACK UP . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 BML 351 013/- and the integrated
battery unit BKB 201 001 . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 BML 351 013/- and battery cabinet
BKB 201 002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 DEPENDENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4 LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5.1 Installing the integrated battery unit
BKB 201 001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5.2 Installing the battery cabinet
BKB 201 002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5.3 Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.4 Start-up of the exchange . . . . . . . . . 6
5.5 Single battery cabinet with
two battery chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6 REPLACING THE BML UNIT . . . . . 7
6.1 BML 351 013/- mounted on an
exchange cabinet.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . 8
7.1 Replacing the integrated
battery unit BKB 210 001 . . . . . . . . . 8
7.2 Replacing batteries in the battery
cabinet BKB 201 002. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8 ALARM CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

1 GENERAL 2 UNPACKING
This document describes the installation and replace-
ment of: 2.1 BML 351 013/- and the integrated
- power supply with battery charger BML351 013/-, battery unit BKB 201 001
- integrated battery unit (BKB 210 001) and
- battery cabinet (BKB 210 002) The BML unit is delivered together with the integrated
in the systems ASB 150 01 and ASB 150 02. battery unit, the cables and other parts necessary for
The following power supplies are available: installation.

230 VAC 48V / 5A (BML 351 013/1) class II unit Before starting please verify that the delivered material
115 VAC 48V / 5A (BML 351 013/2) class II unit is complete.

230 VAC 48V / 5A (BML 351 013/5) class I unit

115 VAC 48V / 5A (BML 351 013/6) class I unit
2.2 BML 351 013/- and battery
The BML unit with safety class I acc. to EN 60 950 pro- cabinet BKB 201 002
vides a protective earth connection from the mains
outlet to the BML unit case and therefore has to be fas- On delivery the BML unit is already mounted on the
tened to the cabinet with 4 self etching screws (SBA rear of the battery cabinet with the mechanics for the
121 040/100) supplied together with the BML unit to batteries installed in the cabinet. The cables and other
make a sound ground connection. parts necessary to install and connect the battery
The integrated battery unit can be used in small ex- cabinet to the exchange are included in the delivery.
changes equipped with up to 6 circuit boards. The bat- The batteries are not included with the battery cabinet
tery unit itself occupies slots 6 - 8. and must be ordered separately.
The battery cabinet is intended for a larger installation Before starting the installation please make sure that
with up to two exchange cabinets. the delivered material is complete.
One BML unit can supply power for up to two
exchange cabinets and a battery pack at the same
time, provided the power requirements of the installed 3 DEPENDENCES
extension sets do not exceed the current rating of the
BML unit.
For examples of power calculation, see document 3.1 ASB 150 01
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(1531-BDV 113 08). Prerequisites: to install the BML unit, the cabinet must
be a BDV 113 07 with 4 mounting holes in the rear.
The BML unit is always mounted on the rear side of
the cabinets BDV 113 08 or BDV 113 07 and is The alarm feature cannot be used in ASB 150 01.
connected to the system by cables supplied with each
unit.
The BML unit can be used solely as a power supply for
the exchange(s) independent of back up batteries.
The power cord is ordered as an individual item, in or-
der to fit the mains plug deviations of each market.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

4 LOCATIONS

BATTERY
UNIT

F1 F2 H
I
CIRCUIT
BREAKER

N A B C D F

Figure 1 power supply with battery charger

BML 351013/-

The physical connections on the BML unit are listed A B C D E

below, together with a simple explanation of their
purpose. Figure 2 integrated battery unit BKB 201 001
All connectors in the BML unit are keyed to prevent
wrong cable connections.

• A is the 6-pin connector that feeds -48 VDC to The integrated battery unit provides the additional
connections:
the batteries in the battery cabinet or the
integrated battery unit. • H and I for the alarm cables.
• B is the output of the alarm relay inside the BML • E is the polarity independent flat pin connection
unit. Its contact will close when the AC power for the -48 V DC to the exchange.
drops out then indicating that the system is
running on battery back up. This integrated battery unit is equipped with a circuit
breaker to disconnect the batteries from the power
• C and D are the -48 VDC outputs that feed the supply unit.
exchange cabinets.

• N is an IEC 320 C13 (17) input connector for the

220 VAC or 115 VAC mains. This input has a
mechanical locking for the power cord to prevent
it from slipping off.

• F1 and F2 are the fuses for the outputs

C and D.
• F is a label stating the fuse ratings in the power
supply unit.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

Make the connections in the battery cabinet according

battery interconnection cables to the wiring diagram below, using the supplied cables.
TRE 990 119/0200
(-) battery terminal
cable (grey)

+ -
- +
to the BML unit

+ -
- + H

CIRCUIT
BREAKER
+ -
to the BML unit

- +
(+) battery terminal A B C D
cable (red)

Figure 3 battery cabinet BKB 201 002

The battery cabinet provides the additional

connections:
WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING
• H and I for the alarm cables. METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS THE
BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH CURRENTS IN
CASE OF SHORT CIRCUIT.
This unit is equipped with a circuit breaker
disconnecting the batteries from the power supply unit.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

5 INSTALLATION 5.1 Installing the integrated battery

unit BKB 201 001
1 If the system is already installed and
operating, inform the customer that your 1 Mount the integrated battery unit with its
work is going to shut down his exchange. left frame, sliding into slot 6 of the cabinet.
Set the circuit breaker to off position.
2 Unscrew and remove the front cover from
the exchange cabinet and note the 2 Plug the cable coming from the battery
position and connections of all boards. unit to the six-pin outlet (A) on the BML
unit. Note that as soon as this cable is
3 Lower the bottom plate and switch off the
plugged in, and the circuit breaker is
power switch. Then remove the 36 VAC
turned on, there are 48 V present in the
power cable, entering the bottom of the
system. Continue with 5.3 or 5.4.
cabinet (E), coming from the transformer
or similar equipment.
4 Note the position of the boards and re- 5.2 Installing the battery cabinet
move them all. Position the BML unit so BKB 201 002
that the connectors are facing the bottom
of the cabinet and the four mounting holes 1 The battery cabinet should be located in
facing the rear of the cabinet. the leftmost position on the wall.
5 Slide the BML unit in at the rear of the MAKE SURE THE CABINET IS 100%
cabinet and secure it with the supplied SECURED TO THE WALL, SINCE THE
four screws. For safety reasons on class I BATTERIES ARE VERY HEAVY.
units verify that the screws are tightened
to the cabinet as they ensure the 2 Drill holes (4) and mount the wall bracket
connection to protective earth. SXA 112 4406 on the wall.
Place the battery cabinet on the bracket.
6 Connect the power cord to the BML unit Tighten the 2 screws at the bottom of the
and plug into mains. Connect cable TRE cabinet to secure it to the wall.
990 113/0850 to one of the two four-pin
outlets (C or D) on the BML unit. It is good 3 Set the circuit breaker to off position.
practice to measure the -48 volt (-54 volt) Mount the four batteries in the battery
before installing the rest of the equipment. cabinet. Interconnect the batteries with
the supplied cables. Then connect the
7 Connect the other end with the flat-pin grey wire with the negative terminal and
connectors (E) on the bottom of the the red wire with the positive.
cabinet. This is polarity independent.
WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING
8 Re-install all boards according to your METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS
notes of the initial configuration. THE BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH
9 If you just had to install the BML 351 013 SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS.
with no back up battery take the 6-pin plug 4 Use cable TRE 990 113/0850 to connect
delivered with the BML unit. Plug it into the outlets (C or D) of the BML unit with
position (A) to prevent ESD discharges the connectors (E) on the bottom of the
directly to the connector. Then switch on exchange cabinet(s). This is polarity
the cabinet and start up the exchange independent.
(see under 5.4). Otherwise continue with
the installation of the appropriate battery 5 Connect the cable coming from the
back up. battery cabinet to the outlet (A) on the
BML unit.
Note that as soon as cable A is plugged in
and the circuit breaker is on, there are
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

48 V present in the system if the switch is 3 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
turned on. Continue with 5.3 or 5.4. cover and tighten the two screws at the
bottom of the front cover.
4 Remove all excess material and inform the
5.3 Alarm connections customer that the system is back in
operation.
ASB 150 01
This feature is not applicable for the ASB 150 01. To
prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to the 5.5 Single battery cabinet with two
alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-pin battery chargers
plug and plug it into output B when the alarm feature is
not used. System configurations having 2 cabinets and 2 charg-
ASB 150 02 ers installed can be switched to just one battery cabi-
net if the additional cabinet has a power consumption
The alarm output which is activated by a mains power of less than 60 W. This restriction is made to achieve a
failure in the BML 351 013, consists of a closing relay sufficient back up time. Use the adapter cable
contact on output B (see figure 1) TSR BS 101 08 and the alarm adapter cable
TSR BS 101 09. If this load restriction cannot be ful-
1 Connect the power supply alarm cable filled two chargers and two battery cabinets are neces-
TRE 990 111/0400 to the two-pin outlet sary. If the distance between cabinet and output (C) or
(B) on the BML unit, and the other end to (D) on the charger exceeds 85 cm use 1,5 m cable
one of the inputs (H or I) on the specific TRE 990 113/1500.
battery units.
2 Connect the free end of the alarm cable
TRE990 112/2000 to the MDF connector
block (YELLOW to a4 and BLUE to b4).
Connect the other end to the remaining
two-pin input connector (H or I) on the
battery unit. TSRBS 101 09
alarm adapter cable
To prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to
the alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-
pin plug and plug it into output B when the alarm
feature is not used.

5.4 Start-up of the exchange

1 Turn on the circuit breaker and switch on 6-pin plug

the power in the cabinet. Observe that the TSRBS 101 08

system starts up correctly. If this is a new power adapter cable
installation, start up the system according
to the document START OF OPERATION
(1537-ASB 150 02 Uen).
2 RASC provides the facility for measuring
the secondary voltages. Use this feature NOTE: Due to battery capacity reasons this
to check the values of the -48V, +5V and +/ applies only to the battery cabinet.
- 12V in the system for proper operation.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

6 REPLACING THE BML UNIT 13 Note that as soon as the cable is plugged
in (A) and the circuit breaker is on, the
-48 V are present in the system.
6.1 BML 351 013/- mounted on an 14 If no battery back up unit is to be installed,
exchange cabinet. an empty 6-pin connector, supplied with
the unit, must be plugged in position (A) to
1 Inform the customer that your work is prevent ESD discharges directly to the
going to stop his exchange for a while. connector.

2 Unscrew and remove the front cover from To prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to
the exchange cabinet. Note the position of the alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-
the boards and cables. pin plug and plug it into output (B) when the alarm
feature is not used.
3 Lower the bottom plate, turn off power
and the circuit breaker on the battery unit. 15 The replacement of the BML unit is now
completed. Reinstall the boards and
4 Remove all cables and the boards from cables. Turn on the power in the cabinet.
the exchange. Disconnect the power cord Take care that the system starts up
from the wall and from the BML unit. correctly.
5 Disconnect the three cables (A,B,C or D) 16 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
from the BML unit that run to the system cover and tighten the two screws at the
(do not disconnect the other end). bottom of the front cover.
6 If installed, slide out the battery unit from 17 Inform the customer that the system is in
the exchange cabinet. The cables operation.
connected to it, will follow the battery unit.
Take off the backplane.
7 Unscrew the four screws in the rear of the
cabinet holding the BML unit.
NOTE: releasing the last screw will let the
BML unit drop out. Hold it from below and
remove it by letting it slide down.
8 Position the new BML unit so that the
connectors are located at the bottom and
the four mounting holes are facing the rear
of the cabinet.
9 Slide the BML unit in at the rear of the
cabinet and secure it with the four screws.
10 If available, install the battery unit by
sliding it into slot 6 of the exchange
cabinet.
11 Reconnect the three cables (A,B,C or D)
disconnected under item 5.
12 Install the power cord and connect to
mains. It is good practice to measure the
-48 volt (-54 volt) before installing the rest
of the equipment.
Then turn on the circuit breaker.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

7 BATTERY REPLACEMENT 7.2 Replacing batteries in the

battery cabinet BKB 201 002.
Battery replacement should be done while the system
is in operation and running on mains. When replacing batteries, make sure that all batteries
NOTE: Batteries are a threat to the environ- are replaced at the same time.
ment and should be handled with great WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING
care. METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS THE
Worn out batteries should be taken BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH CURRENTS IN
care of by recycling specialists. CASE OF SHORT CIRCUIT.
Make sure they get them!
1 Unscrew and remove the front cover from
the battery cabinet.
7.1 Replacing the integrated
2 Make sure that the mains voltage is
battery unit BKB 210 001 present, then turn off the circuit breaker in
the front of the battery unit
The single batteries in the integrated battery unit are
no field replaceable parts. To minimize service time re- 3 Unplug the 6-pin connector (A) on the
place the whole unit. BML unit which feeds the battery unit.
4 Pull out the bottom right battery 4 cm and
1 Unscrew and remove the front cover from remove the cable connection on the plus
the exchange cabinet. terminal. Then proceed with the battery
2 Verify that the unit is running on mains above and remove the minus terminal
then turn off the circuit breaker in the front connection.
of the battery unit. 5 Continue with the batteries on the left and
3 Disconnect the alarm cables on take off the interconnection cable.
connectors (H) and (I) but not the other 6 Remove both batteries from the top and
cable end. Unplug the 6-pin connector (A) the bottom of the cabinet as they are con-
on the BML unit which feeds the battery nected together, replace them with new
unit. ones and re-install them in reverse man-
4 It is now possible to slide out the battery ner. Reconnect the 6-pin connector to the
unit from the exchange cabinet. The 6-pin BML unit.
connector cable will follow the battery unit 7 Turn the circuit breaker on and take care
out. that the exchange continues operation.
5 Install the new battery unit by sliding it into 8 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
slot 6 of the exchange cabinet. cover and tighten the two screws at the
6 Make sure the circuit breaker is in the off bottom of the front cover on the cabinet.
position and then replace the cables 9 The replacement of the batteries is now
(H, I, A) removed under 3 and 4. complete.
7 Turn the circuit breaker on and observe
that the exchange is still operating.
8 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
cover and tighten the two screws at the
bottom of the front cover on the exchange
cabinets.
9 The replacement of the integrated battery
unit is now complete.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 9(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

8 ALARM CONNECTION 8.1 ASB 150 01

The ALARM feature cannot be used in ASB 150 01.

MDF Connector CPU-D
a CPU-D/2
8.2 ASB 150 02

1
b
a
2 2 Prerequisites: In order to install the alarm feature, the
b
a CPU-D (ROF 157 5118/1) must have revision R1A/A
ab
or higher. CPU-D/2 (ROF 157 5118/2) must have
3

b
a
YELLOW revision R1A or higher.
BLUE
4

b cd
In case of mains failure the ALARM feature indicates
a
that the system is running on battery power. The Erics-
5

b ef son standard I/O cable TSR 902 0444/1 carries all fea-
a
ture connections from the front connector of the
6

b
a
gh CPU-D board to the MDF connection block.
7

b Should the system already use some of the system

a
features, (MUSIC input, ALARM output or
8

b
TEMPERATURE SENSORS) such a cable has alerady
a
been installed.
9

b
a 4 For the CPU-D, the connection is to be made to field 6
Most
0

b
ab CD,EF, and for CPU-D/2 the connection is to be made
positive
(0 V) to 4 EF,GH.

CPU-D/2 cd If the connection is to be done directly on the front of

A BC the CPU-D_ board, use cable TRE 990 112/3000 and
18
20 ef connect the most positive wire (YELLOW) to pin C14
22
24 on CPU-D and pin C22 on CPU-D/2. The most
26
28
negative (BLUE) is to be connected to pin C16 on
30
gh CPU-D and to pin C24 on CPU-D/2.
32

Most
negative
(-48 V)
Most 6
positive
(0 V) ab
A BC
10
12
14 cd
16
18
20
22 ef
24
CPU-D
Most oh
Common i/o cable negative
TSR 902 0444/1 (-48 V)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 10(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

9 ELECTRICAL 10 BATTERY DATA

CONNECTION
10.1 Integrated battery unit

The 8 batteries (BKC 850 007) in the integrated

f battery unit BKB 201 001 can be ordered separately,

EXCHANGE 1
but the whole lot should be replaced at the same time.
EXCHANGE 2
(optional)

MDF
For replacement, we recommend the batteries should
be purchased from ERICSSON, as they are a
HIGH-quality LONG-life type that is not commonly
available.

10.2 Battery cabinet

When replacing batteries, make sure that all batteries

g d c e are replaced at the same time. The batteries can be
purchased from ERICSSON with the ordering number
BATTERY CABINET BKC 851 003, or you can purchase the battery at a
D
POWER SUPPLY

local vendor.
The batteries required should have the following
C

ratings:
b
B

a ERICSSON product number. BKC 851 003

A

VOLTAGE: 12 V
CAPACITY: min. 15 Ah
The cables required to connect the BML unit to the
exchange and the battery units are listed below. TYPE: VR (valve regulated)
SIZE: L=181 mm H=167 mm W=76 mm
a battery power cable. This cable is part of the
battery unit or battery cabinet The terminal should provide screw type connection.

b power supply alarm cable TRE 990 111/0400 Representative types: VARTA accu-CF 12V/15 Ah

c exchange power cable TRE 990 113/0850 HITACHI HP15-12

d exchange power cable TRE 990 113/0850 (a YUASA NP15-12

longer power cable TRE 990 113/1500 (1,5m
long) is available, if this cable is too short)
e alarm cable TRE 990 112/3000
f common MDF cable
g mains cord (see ordering information)
The plug must be straight style and moulded to
the cord. For class II equipment use a plug of the
type IEC 320 C17 and for class I equipment use
a plug of the type IEC 320 C13.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 11(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

11 BATTERY BACK UP So charge them again as soon as possible after the

power failure. If the batteries are completely
For the BusinessPhone 250 there are 2 different types discharged and it is not possible to charge them, turn
of battery back up units. The AC/DC switcher off the circuit breaker on the battery unit to prevent
converter BML 351 013/x is used to charge the deep discharging and charge them again as soon as
batteries, deliver power to the exchange and switch possible.
over to emergency powering from the connected Under normal operating conditions this will not be a
battery in case of mains power failure. problem as battery charging commences as soon as
When the system is running on batteries the the mains returns. If the batteries have to be left
BML 351 013/x provides an under voltage trip to discharged the circuit breaker should be turned off.
disconnect the batteries after the 44 volt limithas been Back up time
reached. Thus deep discharge of the batteries is
prevented. Measurements on back up time have been taken from
the different battery back up units. The value stated
Handling batteries is a delicate job and requires within brackets () are the available line currents.
thought and care. Batteries do NOT last for ever, but Power consumption for all boards in the cabinet and
with the right treatment they will serve a long time battery charging have been deduced from the figure
without any trouble. within brackets.
Both battery back-up units use sealed batteries that do The small battery back up unit (BKB 201 001) is used
not require any service, however batteries must not be to supply up to 6 boards and the battery cabinet
subjected to high temperatures, which reduces their (BKB 201 001) is used to supply a fully equipped
lifetime and batteries should NOT be left uncharged cabinet with 9 boards.
after a discharge cycle, as this may destroy the
batteries permanently.

BKB 201 001

This is the smaller integrated unit with the batteries located inside the exchange cabinet (in position 6),
occupying 3 board slots. The back up time for 3 different current loads are shown below.
A system with 53 DBC 203 telephones uses 2.5 Amp (1.6 Amp) from the battery.
A system with 33 DBC 203 telephones uses 1.9 Amp (1 Amp) from the battery.
A system with 13 DBC 203 telephones uses 1.3 Amp (0.4 Amp) from the battery.

Battery
voltage
Battery low voltage limit
44 V
2.5A 1.9A 1.3A

45 V

46 V

47 V

48 V

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Minutes
Installation instruction 12(12)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 013 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
98-11-20 G

BKB 201 002

This larger battery back up unit housed in a separate cabinet with batteries rated with 15Ah
has the charger BML 351 013/x mounted at the rear of the cabinet. The back up times with three
current loads are shown below.

A system with 116 DBC 203 telephones uses 4.5 Amp (3.5 Amp) from the battery.
A system with 83 DBC 203 telephones uses 3.5 Amp (2.5 Amp) from the battery.
A system with 50 DBC 203 telephones uses 2.5 Amp (1.5 Amp) from the battery.

Battery
voltage
Battery low voltage limit
44 V
4.5A 3.5A 2.5A

45 V

46 V

47 V

48 V

0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0

Hours
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
SEA/EBMP Stangelberger SEA/EBAX/F 1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
SEA/EBMP 1998-05-29 A ASB 150
Database reference
1531-BML 351 048 Uen-1-A.emf

POWER SUPPLY PSU 75 & 8.2 ASB 150 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION . . . . 10
BATTERY CHARGER 10 BATTERY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
10.1 Integrated battery unit . . . . . . . . . . 10
BML 351 048 10.2 Battery cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 BML 351 048 and the integrated
battery unit BKB 201 001 . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 BML 351 048 and battery
cabinet BKB 201 002 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 DEPENDENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4 LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5.1 Installing the integrated battery
unit BKB 201 001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.2 Installing the battery cabinet
BKB 201 002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.3 Alarm connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5.4 Start-up the exchange . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6 REPLACING THE BML UNIT . . . . . 7
6.1 BML 351 048 mounted on an
exchange cabinet.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . 8
7.1 Replacing the integrated
battery unit BKB 210 001 . . . . . . . . . 8
7.2 Replacing batteries in the battery
cabinet BKB 201 002. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8 ALARM CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

1 GENERAL 2 UNPACKING
This document describes the installation and replace-
ment of: 2.1 BML 351 048 and the integrated
- power supply with battery charger BML351 048, battery unit BKB 201 001
- integrated battery unit (BKB 210 001) and
- battery cabinet (BKB 210 002) The BML unit is delivered together with the integrated
in the systems ASB 150 01 and ASB 150 02. battery unit, the cables and other parts necessary for
The power supply PSU 75 is available as: installation.

230 VAC 48V / 5A (BML 351 048) class I unit Before starting please verify that the delivered material
is complete.
The BML unit with safety class I acc. to EN 60 950 pro-
vides a protective earth connection from the mains
outlet to the BML unit case and therefore has to be fas-
2.2 BML 351 048 and battery cabinet
tened to the cabinet with 4 self etching screws sup-
plied together with the BML unit to make a sound BKB 201 002
ground connection.
On delivery the BML unit is already mounted on the
The integrated battery unit can be used in small ex- back of the battery cabinet with the mechanics for the
changes equipped with up to 6 circuit boards. The bat- batteries installed in the cabinet. The cables and other
tery unit itself occupies slots 6 - 8. parts necessary to install and connect the battery
The battery cabinet is intended for a larger installation cabinet to the exchange are included in the delivery.
with up to two exchange cabinets. The batteries are not included with the battery cabinet
One BML unit can supply power for up to two and must be ordered separately.
exchange cabinets and a battery pack at the same Before starting the installation please make sure that
time, provided the power requirements of the installed the delivered material is complete.
extension sets do not exceed the current rating of the
BML unit.
The BML unit is always mounted on the back side of 3 DEPENDENCES
the cabinets BDV 113 08 or BDV 113 07 and is
connected to the system by cables supplied with each
unit. 3.1 ASB 150 01
The BML unit can be used solely as a power supply for
the exchange(s) independent of backup batteries. Prerequisites: to install the BML unit, the cabinet must
be a BDV 113 07 with 4 mounting holes in the back.
The power cord is ordered as an individual item, in or-
der to fit the mains plug deviations of each market. The alarm feature cannot be used in ASB 150 01.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

4 LOCATIONS

4.0.1 Power Supply PSU 75 with battery charger (BML 351 048)

The switched mode power supply is available for applications demanding a higher current than supplied by the trans-
former and/or a battery backup for the PBX is required. This unit can also be used without battery backup.

220-240VAC Btest/Alm D3 D2 D1 T10A 250V Batt

Figure 1. Locations on BML 351 048 D B C A

The physical connections on the BML 351 048 are listed below, together with a simple explanation of their purpose.
All connectors in the BML unit are keyed to prevent wrong cable connections.

• Batt is the 6-pin connector feeding the -48 VDC batteries in the battery cabinet or the integrated battery unit
• Btest/Alm is the output of the alarm relay inside the BML unit. The left part of the connector should be left
free and supports Btest, which is a functionality prepared for future use.The right part of the connector provides
the contacts for the alarm which closes the circuit during AC power outage

• D1 and D2 are the full rate -48 VDC outputs that feed the exchange cabinets, D3 is the -48 VDC output for
auxiliary equipment e.g. IC-CU, IC-LU, ISDN NT if needed. This output is current limited to 2.0A

• Mains is connected via an IEC 320 C13 (17) input connector for the 230 VAC. This input has a mechanical
locking for the straight power cord to prevent it from slipping off

• Fuse (T10A/250VAC) is the output fuse for D1 and D2

• F is a label stating the equipment, ratings serial number, production information, safety and CE marking.
NOTE: Mount the power supply unit securely to the cabinet with the supplied self-etching TORX screws .
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

battery interconnection cables

TRE 990 119/0200

BATTERY
UNIT
+ -
(-) battery terminal
cable (grey)
H
I
CIRCUIT - + H
BREAKER
I
(+) battery terminal
cable (red)

CIRCUIT
BREAKER

A C B D E

Figure 2 integrated battery unit BKB 201 001

A C B D
The integrated battery unit provides the additional
connections: Figure 3 battery cabinet BKB 201 002
• H and I for the alarm cables. The battery cabinet provides the additional
connections:
• E is the polarity independent flat pin connection
for the -48 V DC to the exchange. • H and I for the alarm cables.
This integrated battery unit is equipped with a circuit
breaker to disconnect the batteries from the power
supply unit.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

Make the connections in the battery cabinet according 5 INSTALLATION

to the wiring diagram below, using the supplied cables.
1 If the system is already installed and
operating, inform the customer that your
+ work is going to shut down his exchange.
-
2 Unscrew and remove the front cover from
to the BML unit the exchange cabinet and note the
+ - position and connections of all boards.
3 Lower the bottom plate and switch OFF
the power switch. Then remove the 36
VAC power cable, entering the bottom of
the cabinet (E), coming from the trans-
former or similar equipment.
4 Note the position of the boards and re-
+ - move them all. Position the BML unit so
that the connectors are facing the bottom
to the BML unit of the cabinet and the four mounting holes
facing the back of the cabinet.
- +
5 Slide the BML unit in at the back of the
cabinet and secure it with the supplied
four screws. For safety reasons on class I
units verify that the screws are tightened
to the cabinet as they ensure the
connection to protective earth.
WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING
METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS THE 6 Connect the power cord to the BML unit
BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH CURRENTS IN and plug into mains. Connect cable
CASE OF SHORT CIRCUIT. TRE 990 113/0850 to one of the two four-
pin outlets (D1 and D2) on the BML unit. It
This unit is equipped with a circuit breaker is good practice to measure the -48 volt (-
disconnecting the batteries from the power supply unit. 54 volt) before installing the rest of the
equipment.
7 Connect the other end with the flat-pin
connectors (E) on the bottom of the
cabinet. This is polarity independent.
8 Re-install all boards according to your
notes of the initial configuration.
9 If you just had to install the BML 351 048
with no backup battery take the 6-pin plug
delivered with the BML unit. Plug it into
position (A) to prevent ESD discharges
directly to the connector. Then switch the
cabinet ON and start up the exchange
(see under 5.4). Otherwise continue with
the installation of the appropriate battery
backup.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

5.1 Installing the integrated battery 5.3 Alarm connections

unit BKB 201 001
ASB 150 01
1 Install the integrated battery unit in slot 6 This feature is not applicable for the ASB 150 01. To
of the cabinet. Set the circuit breaker to prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to the
position OFF. alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-pin
2 Plug the cable coming from the battery plug and plug it into output B when the alarm feature is
unit into the six-pin outlet (A) on the BML not used.
unit. Note that as soon as this cable is ASB 150 02
plugged in, and the circuit breaker is
turned ON, 48 V are present in the sys- The alarm output (B) closes during mains power
tem. Continue with 5.3 or 5.4. failure (see figure 1).

1 Connect the power supply alarm cable

5.2 Installing the battery cabinet TRE 990 111/0400 to right part of outlet
(B) on the BML unit, and the other end to
BKB 201 002
one of the inputs (H or I) on the specific
battery units.
1 The battery cabinet should be located in
the leftmost position on the wall. 2 Connect the free end of the alarm cable
TRE990 112/2000 to the MDF connector
MAKE SURE THE CABINET IS 100%
block (YELLOW to a4 and BLUE to b4).
SECURED TO THE WALL, AS THE
BATTERIES ARE VERY HEAVY. To prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to
the alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-
2 Drill holes (4) and mount the wall bracket
pin plug and plug it into output B when the alarm
SXA 112 4406 on the wall. Hang the
feature is not used.
battery cabinet on the bracket and secure
the cabinet with 2 screws at the bottom.
3 Set the circuit breaker to OFF position. 5.4 Start-up the exchange
Connect the batteries in series with the
supplied cables and put the four batteries 1 Turn on the circuit breaker and switch ON
in the battery cabinet. Then connect the the power in the cabinet. Observe that the
grey wire with the negative terminal and system starts up correctly. If this is a new
the red wire with the positive. installation, start up the system according
WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING to the document START OF OPERATION
METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS (1537-ASB 150 02 Uen).
THE BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH 2 RASC provides the facility for measuring
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENTS. the secondary voltages. Use this feature
4 Use cable TRE 990 113/0850 to connect to check the values of the -48V, +5V and +/
the outlets (D1 and D2) of the BML unit - 12V in the system.
with the connectors (E) on the bottom of 3 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
the exchange cabinet(s). cover and tighten the two screws at the
5 Connect the battery cable (a) to the outlet bottom of the front cover.
(A) on the BML unit. Note that as soon as 4 Remove all excess material and inform the
cable A is plugged in and the circuit customer that the system is back in
breaker is ON, 48 V are present in the operation.
system if the switch is turned ON.
Continue with 5.3 or 5.4.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 7(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

6 REPLACING THE BML UNIT 13 Note that as soon as the cable is plugged
in (A) and the circuit breaker is ON, the
-48 V are present in the system.
6.1 BML 351 048 mounted on an 14 If no battery backup unit is to be installed,
exchange cabinet. an empty 6-pin connector, supplied with
the unit, must be plugged in position (A) to
1 Inform the customer that your work is prevent ESD discharges directly to the
going to stop his exchange for a while. connector.

2 Unscrew and remove the front cover from To prevent electrostatic discharges (ESD) directly to
the exchange cabinet. Note the position of the alarm connector pins use the enclosed plastic 2-
the boards and cables. pin plug and plug it into output (B) when the alarm
feature is not used.
3 Lower the bottom plate, turn OFF power
and the circuit breaker on the battery unit. 15 The replacement of the BML unit is now
completed. Reinstall the boards and
4 Remove all cables and the boards from cables. Turn on the power in the cabinet.
the exchange. Disconnect the power cord Take care that the system starts up
from the wall and from the BML unit. correctly.
5 Disconnect the three cables (A,B,C or D) 16 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
from the BML unit that run to the system cover and tighten the two screws at the
(do not disconnect the other end). bottom of the front cover.
6 If installed, slide out the battery unit from 17 Inform the customer that the system is in
the exchange cabinet. The cables operation.
connected to it, will follow the battery unit.
Take off the back plane.
7 Unscrew the four screws in the back of the
cabinet holding the BML unit.
NOTE: releasing the last screw will let the
BML unit drop out. Hold it from below and
remove it by letting it slide down.
8 Position the new BML unit so that the
connectors are located at the bottom and
the four mounting holes are facing the
back of the cabinet.
9 Slide the BML unit in at the rear of the
cabinet and secure it with the four screws.
10 If available, install the battery unit by
sliding it into slot 6 of the exchange
cabinet.
11 Reconnect the three cables (A,B,C or D)
disconnected under item 5.
12 Install the power cord and connect to
mains. It is good practice to measure the
-48 volt (-54 volt) before installing the rest
of the equipment.
Then turn on the circuit breaker.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 8(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

7 BATTERY REPLACEMENT 7.2 Replacing batteries in the

battery cabinet BKB 201 002.
Battery replacement should be done while the system
is in operation and running on mains. When replacing batteries, make sure that all batteries
NOTE: Batteries are a threat to the environ- are replaced at the same time.
ment and should be handled with great WARNING: TAKE CARE WHEN USING
care. METAL NON-INSULATED TOOLS AS THE
Worn out batteries should be taken BATTERIES DELIVER HIGH CURRENTS IN
care of by recycling specialists. CASE OF SHORT CIRCUIT.
Make sure they get them!
1 Unscrew and remove the front cover from
the battery cabinet.
7.1 Replacing the integrated
2 Make sure that the mains voltage is
battery unit BKB 210 001 present, then turn OFF the circuit breaker
in the front of the battery unit
The single batteries in the integrated battery unit are
no field replaceable parts. To minimize service time re- 3 Unplug the 6-pin connector (A) on the
place the whole unit. BML unit which feeds the battery unit.
4 Pull out the bottom right battery 4 cm and
1 Unscrew and remove the front cover from remove the cable connection on the plus
the exchange cabinet. terminal. Then proceed with the battery
2 Verify that the unit is running on mains above and remove the minus terminal
then turn the circuit breaker of the battery connection.
unit OFF. 5 Continue with the batteries on the left and
3 Disconnect the alarm cables (connectors take off the interconnection cable.
(H) and (I)) but not the other cable end. 6 Remove both batteries from the top and
Unplug the 6-pin connector (A) on the the bottom of the cabinet as they are con-
BML unit which feeds the battery unit. nected together, replace them with new
4 It is now possible to slide out the battery ones and re-install them in reverse man-
unit and the 6-pin connector cable will ner. Reconnect the 6-pin connector to the
follow the battery unit out. BML unit.
5 Install the new battery unit by sliding it into 7 Turn the circuit breaker ON and take care
slot 6 of the exchange cabinet. that the exchange continues operation.
6 Make sure the circuit breaker is in the OFF 8 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
position and then replace the cables cover and tighten the two screws at the
(H, I, A) removed under 3 and 4. bottom of the front cover on the cabinet.
7 Turn the circuit breaker ON and observe 9 The replacement of the batteries is now
that the exchange is still operating. complete.
8 Raise the bottom plate, replace the front
cover and tighten the two screws at the
bottom of the front cover on the exchange
cabinets.
9 The replacement of the integrated battery
unit is now complete.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 9(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

8 ALARM CONNECTION 8.1 ASB 150 01

The ALARM feature cannot be used in ASB 150 01.

MDF Connector CPU-D
a CPU-D/_
8.2 ASB 150 02

1
b
a
2 2 Prerequisites: In order to install the alarm feature, the
b
a CPU-D (ROF 157 5118/1) must have revision R1A/A
ab
or higher.
3

b
a
YELLOW
BLUE In case of mains failure the ALARM feature indicates
4

b cd
that the system is running on battery power. The Erics-
a
son standard I/O cable TSR 902 0444/1 carries all fea-
5

b ef ture connections from the front connector of the

a
CPU-D board to the MDF connection block.
6

b
a
gh
Should the system already use some of the system
7

b features, (MUSIC input, ALARM output or

a
TEMPERATURE SENSORS) such a cable has alerady
8

b
been installed.
a
9

b For the CPU-D, the connection is to be made to field 6

a 4 CD,EF, and for CPU-D_ the connection is to be made
Most
0

b
ab to 4 EF,GH.
positive
(0 V) If the connection is to be done directly on the front of
CPU-D_ cd the CPU-D_ board, use cable TRE 990 112/3000 and
A BC connect the most positive wire (YELLOW) to pin C14
18
20 ef on CPU-D and pin C22 on CPU-D_. The most
22
24 negative (BLUE) is to be connected to pin C16 on
26
28
CPU-D and to pin C24 on CPU-D_.
30
gh
32

Most
negative
(-48 V)
Most 6
positive
(0 V) ab
A BC
10
12
14 cd
16
18
20
22 ef
24
CPU-D
Most oh
Common i/o cable negative
TSR 902 0444/1 (-48 V)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 10(10)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-BML 351 048 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1998-05-29 A

9 ELECTRICAL 10 BATTERY DATA

CONNECTION
10.1 Integrated battery unit

The 8 batteries (BKC 850 007) in the integrated

f battery unit BKB 201 001 can be ordered separately,

EXCHANGE 1
but the whole lot should be replaced at the same time.
EXCHANGE 2
(optional)

MDF
For replacement, we recommend the batteries should
be purchased from ERICSSON, as they are a
HIGH-quality LONG-life type that is not commonly
available.

10.2 Battery cabinet

When replacing batteries, make sure that all batteries

g d c e are replaced at the same time. The batteries can be
purchased from ERICSSON with the ordering number
BATTERY CABINET BKC 851 003, or you can purchase the battery at a
D
POWER SUPPLY

local vendor.
The batteries required should have the following
C

ratings:
b
B

a ERICSSON product number. BKC 851 003

A

VOLTAGE: 12 V
CAPACITY: min. 15 Ah
The cables required to connect the BML unit to the
exchange and the battery units are listed below. TYPE: VR (valve regulated)
SIZE: L=181 mm H=167 mm W=76 mm
a battery power cable. This cable is part of the
battery unit or battery cabinet The terminal should provide screw type connection.

b power supply alarm cable TRE 990 111/0400 Representative types: VARTA accu-CF 12V/15 Ah

c exchange power cable TRE 990 113/0850 HITACHI HP15-12

d exchange power cable TRE 990 113/0850 (a YUASA NP15-12

longer power cable TRE 990 113/1500 (1,5 m
long) is available, if this cable is too short)
e alarm cable TRE 990 112/3000
f common MDF cable
g mains cord (see ordering information)
The plug must be straight style and moulded to
the cord. For class II equipment use a plug of the
type IEC 320 C17 and for class I equipment use
a plug of the type IEC 320 C13.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
EBC/B/XFGC C-G. Svensson EBC/B/XFGC 1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
EBC/B/XG Christer Westerlund 1993-11-09 C ASB 150
Database reference
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen-2-C.emf

TEMPERATURE SENSOR KIT

RPM 603 339/1

Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 ASB 150 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 FUNCTIONALITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 ASB 150 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION . . . . . 4
3.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.2 ASB 150 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4 FUNCTION VERIFICATION . . . . . . . 5
4.1 ASB 150 01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 ASB 150 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
5 TECHNICAL DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-09 C

1 GENERAL
This document describes how to install the water proof
temperature sensor(s) RPM 603 339.
The temperature sensor(s) may be situated outdoor to
measure the outdoor temperature.
The document describes the connection to both
ASB 150 01 and ASB 150 02.

1.1 ASB 150 01

The sensor is connected to ELU-A10 by a 10m cable,

and is attached to the front of ELU-A10 (4*3) by a
molex connector. The molex connector is not mounted
in order to cut/extend the cable to suitable length.
These components are necessary to get the
temperature function:
• ELU-A10 (please see section 2.1.2 for
demanded revision on PCB (revision R3 or
higher on TVM 115 5025)
• Tools for cable stripping and mounting of
temperature sensor on the wall
• Cable kit RPM 603 339/1 which contains:
• Molex connector
• cable with temperature sensor
• wood screw

1.2 ASB 150 02

The sensor(s) is connected to the ASB 150 02 system

through a 10m cable.
For connection of the temperature sensor(s) to the
CPU-D or AUX board, the standard i/o cable
TSR 902 0444 may be used.
This cable will carry all feature connections from the
CPU-D board to the MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
Should this system already be using some of the
system features (music input, alarm output, alarm
input or temperature sensors) there is already such a
cable installed.
It is possible to connect 3 external temperature
sensors to either board type.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-09 C

These components are necessary to get the 2 FUNCTIONALITY

temperature function:
• AUX board ROF 157 5119 or/and CPU-D board The temperature is displayed on the digital phones
ROF 157 5118 with display. The temperature trend, increasing or de-
creasing, is indicated by” ^” for increasing and “v” for
• (cable TSR 902 0444) decreasing. Please note that the indication of tempera-
• Tools for mounting of temperature sensor on the ture trend, for the first 30 minutes after installation may
wall. not be correct (while reference values are being re-
corded).
• Tools for connecting the sensor cable to the
connection block in the MDF.
• Cable kit RPM 603 339/1 which contains: 2.1 ASB 150 01
• cable with temperature sensor
• wood screw 2.1.1 Programming
• MOLEX connector
No commands is needed to get the temperature indi-
(not used in ASB 150 02)
cation. The temperature indication is automatically
Central software release R1 does NOT support more turned on after the sensor is connected to ELU-A10,
than one sensor. This sensor must be installed as and turned off after disconnection of the sensor.
sensor 1 connected to the CPU-D. Please note that only one temperature sensor is to be
installed for one system.

2.1.2 Possible revisions for temperature

function

These revisions are necessary for ROF 157 50 25/X to

get the temperature function:
/2,3,4,5,7,8,11,12 R2A/A or higher revision
/6,10 R3A/A or higher revision.

2.2 ASB 150 02

2.2.1 Programming

In central software release R1 there is no program-

ming necessary.
In forthcoming central software releases there will be
some programming required to select sensor and how
to display its data.
Programming of these features will be done in the
RASC support system.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 4(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-09 C

3 HARDWARE If the sensor is to be placed outside it is preferably

mounted on a wall outside, with the attached screw,
INSTALLATION that is not placed in direct sunlight. A desirable place is
for instance a shady place under the roof. Try not to
place the sensor near a window that is often open for
3.1 ASB 150 01 airing or near an output for the ventilation.
The cable is preferably drawn as little as possible
outdoor.
Board The cable should be run to ELU-A10 directly,
position 0 1 2 3 8 superfluous cable is to be cut off.
The wires are connected to pin 1 & 2 in the molex
connector (non-polarized connection).
The molex connector is connected to field 4*3 to a
Field 2
ELU-A10 printed circuit board (please see section
2.1.2 for from what revision it is possible)
If the sensor is located more than 10 m from the
exchange, we recommend you to use a twisted pair
cable for extension.
Field 4
3.2 ASB 150 02

4*3 If the sensor is to be placed outside it is preferably

mounted on a wall outside, with the attached screw,
that is not placed in direct sunlight. A desirable place is
Field 6 for instance a shady place under the roof. Try not to
place the sensor near a window that is often open for
airing or near an output for the ventilation. The cable is
preferably drawn as little as possible outdoor and
To
directly to the MDF, superfluous cable is to be cut off.
line board
ELU-A10 If the sensor is located more than 10 m from the
exchange, we recommend you to use a twisted pair
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
cable for extension.
The wires are connected to the connection block pin
Not Field connection by a5 and b5, a6 and b6, a7 and b7 (non-polariz)
necessary means of connector
RNT 247 011/22 (MOLEX)
MDF

Temperature sensor
kit RPM 603 339/1
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 5(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-09 C

4 FUNCTION VERIFICATION
a

1
b
a 4.1 ASB 150 01

2
b
a Verify on a digital telephone with display that the tem-

3
b perature indication correspond with actual tempera-
a ture. Note that there is a set up time after installation of

4
b the temperature sensor on about 1 minute before the
a temperature indication starts.
External sensor 1

5
b
a Please note that the indication of temperature trend,
External sensor 2

6
b for the first 30 minutes after installation may not be cor-
a rect (while reference values are being recorded).
External sensor 3

7
b
a
If there is a short cut on the temperature sensor cable,
the temperature indication will show +99° C.
b 8
a There is no necessity or possibility to adjust the sensi-
9

b
tivity of the temperature sensor.
a
0

4.2 ASB 150 02

Verify on a digital telephone with display that the tem-

perature indication correspond with actual tempera-
ture. Note that there is a set up time after installation of
The temperature sensor may also be directly connect-
the temperature sensor of about 1 minute before the
ed to the front of CPU-D/1 or AUX/1 at connection
temperature indication is correct.
field 6 and CPU-D/2, CPU-E or AUX/2 at connection
field 4. Please note that the indication of temperature trend,
for the first 30 minutes after installation may not be cor-
rect (while reference values are being recorded).
Connection field 4 at the front of CPU-D/2, CPU-E If the sensor is open or short circuit there is no indica-
and AUX/2 A C External tion (blank) on the telephone display.
External 26 sensor 3
sensor 1 There is no necessity or possibility to adjust the sensi-
28 0V tivity of the temperature sensor.
0V
External 30 Not used
sensor 2 32 Not used
0V

Connection field 6 at the front of CPU-D/1 and AUX/1

A C External
External 18 sensor 3
sensor 1 20 0V
0V
External 22 Not used
sensor 2 24 Not used
0V
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 6(6)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1531-RPM 603 339 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-09 C

5 TECHNICAL DATA
Measure accuracy: ± 0.5° C
(at -24 - +75° C)
± 1° C
(at -40° C - +100° C)

Temperature range: -40 - +75° C

Maximum recom-
mended line length: 50 m
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1(3)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
EBC/B/XFEC C-G Svensson EBC/B/XFC 1/1531-ASB 150 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
EBC/B/XG Christer Westerlund 1993-11-15 B ASB 150 02
Database reference
1_1531-ASB 150 02 Uen-1-B.emf

MUSIC INPUT INSTALLATION

Contents Page

1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 FUNCTIONALITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 DEPENDENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION . . . . . 2
5 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6 FUNCTION VERIFICATION . . . . . . . 3
7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . 3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 2(3)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1/1531-ASB 150 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-15 B

1 GENERAL
MDF Connector CPU-D/1
a
CPU-D/2
This document describes how to connect the MUSIC CPU-E

1
input to the ASB 150 02 system. b MUSIC
a input AUX/1
AUX/2

2
The description is valid for CPU-D, CPU-E and AUX b
boards. a
2

3
b
The MUSIC input can be used in the system to pro- a ab
vide, for example MUSIC ON HOLD when connected

4
b
to either or both CPU-D (ROF 157 5118/1, -/2), CPU-E a
(ROF 157 5124) and AUX (ROF 157 5119/1, -/2). cd

5
b
a

6
b ef
2 FUNCTIONALITY a

7
b
gh
a
The music output from a radio or tape recorder is fed

8
b
into the system via the CPU-D, CPU-E or AUX boards. a
By programming the exchange, the output from the

9
b
connected equipment can be distributed throughout a
the system.

0
b 4

CPU-D/2 ab
3 DEPENDENCIES CPU-E
AUX/2
cd
CPU-D and AUX boards must have revision R1A/A or MUSIC A B C
higher and CPU-E board must have revision R1A. input 18
20
22
ef
Central software release R1 does not support this 24
26
function for the AUX board. 28
gh
30
32

4 HARDWARE
INSTALLATION
6
A twisted pair or a shielded cable should be connected
from the tape recorder output on a radio or tape ab
recorder to a1, b1 on the connector block of the MUSIC A B C
Ericsson standard MDF cable TSR 902 0444/1. input 10
12
14 cd
16
The Ericsson standard MDF cable will carry all CPU-D/1 18
AUX/1 20
connections of the CPU-D, CPU-E and AUX options, to 22 ef
the MDF. If any of the board options are installed in the 24

system, this cable is already installed. Common i/o cable oh

TSR 902 0444/1
It is also possible to connect a cable from the music
equipment directly to the input of the CPU-D, CPU-E or
AUX board front. The connection should then be made
to pins A10, A12 of connector 6 for CPU-D/1 or AUX/1
and to pin A18, A20 of connector 4 for
CPU-D/2, CPU-E and AUX/2.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 3(3)
Uppgjord/Prepared Faktaansvarig - Subject responsible Dokumentnr/Documentnr
1/1531-ASB 150 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr/Checked Datum/Date Rev Tillhör/Referens-File/Reference
1993-11-15 B

5 PROGRAMMING
Programming of this feature is done with the aid of the
support system RASC.
Please consult the document START OF OPERATION
(1537-ASB 150 02) or use the RASC system directly
for details.

6 FUNCTION VERIFICATION
Please consult the document START OF OPERATION
(1537-ASB 150 02) .

7 TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
MUSIC input: Impedans 600 ohm
Voltage 1 V max
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
EBC/EN/DMTL Thomas Åsberg 1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
EN/DMTL (Sture Winther) 1997-06-18 A

Telephone sets (DBC 210 01and DBY 410 02)

1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4 Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

5 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

7 Installation of DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

8 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Created by: EBCINSV
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

1 General

1.1 Scope

The digital telephone sets (DTS) and peripherals described in these installation instructions are
to be used together with the Ericsson exchanges ASB 501, ASB 150 02 or equivalent.

The DTS is connected to a digital extension board, ELU 28, or equivalent.

1.2 Environmental requirements

The products covered in these installation instructions comply with the prerequisites stipulated
for placing in office and exchange room environments.

2 Aids

Wall mounting requires additional screws.

Wall mounting with option unit requires additional washers (spacers).

3 Preparations

Verify that it is possible to connect an extension line.

Check that a line cord is available.

4 Power equipment

The DTS and its peripherals are powered from the extension line.
Maximum power consumption: 2 W

5 Earthing

The DTS and its peripherals need no special earthing.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

6 Cabling

Maximum line length between DTS and extension line unit (ELU) using
EKKX 0,5 mm (180 ohms/km) cable: 1000 m (3280 ft):

7 Installation of DTS

7.1 Delivery method

The DTS is normally delivered in a box together with two foot consoles, one handset,
one handset cord, two designation labels and two designation covers.

7.2 Connection of the handset

The handset cord shall be connected in one end (short uncoiled) to the handset
and the other end (long uncoiled) to the connector in the bottom of the set marked HANDSET.
Use the cord guide to secure the handset cord to the DTS.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

7.3 Connection to the extension line

The line cord shall be connected in one end to the wall box according to fig 7-1 and the other end
to the connector in the bottom of the set marked LINE.
Figure: 7-1. Connection of extension line

7.4 Wall mounting

• Mount the two screws on the wall according to fig 7-2.

• Snap off and turn the hook around according to fig 7-3.
• If the adjustable foot consoles are mounted they must be removed.
• Mount the telephone on the screws.
Figure: 7-2. (All distances in mm)
Positions for screws DBC 210 01
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

Figure: 7-3. Mounting of hook

Position for hook:

Wall mounting

180

7.5 Post installation measures

Verify that a call can be established from and to the DTS.

8 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02

Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges:

• Disconnect the telephone set from the exchange

• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts

• Break off the blinder covering the contact C4.

• Connect the cable P1 from DBY 410 02 to the contact C4 on the telephone.
• Insert DBY 410 02 to its place in the bottom of the telephone. Secure it with the screw SCR 1.
• Remove the blinder covering the connectors.
• Move the handset cord from the DTS to the jack J1 marked HANDSET.

Note: When using DBY 410 02 the handset connector on the DTS will be disabled.

With the DBY 410 02 mounted, the telephone must be wall mounted using extra spacers.
Spacers, with a thickness > 22 mm, have to be mounted between the telephone and the wall.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 6(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

Figure: 8-1. Rear view of DTS with DBY 410 02 connectors.

DBC 210 01

8.1 Programming of option unit functions

To program the option unit functions, OPTION UNIT FUNCTION MODE must be selected by
pressing buttons C, * and 1 simultaneously during 1 second. The present setting is then indicated
by the four bottom LEDs of the DTS.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 7(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

Figure: 8-2. Option unit function mode settings

LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9

LED Number LED ON LED OFF

6 PC-Audio Tape recorder mode

7 Headset mode Extra handset

8 Busy signal Extra bell

9 HA level (See below) Normal level

To change the settings the corresponding buttons can be pressed and the change of status will
be indicated by the associated LED.

To exit the programming mode press # or wait 30 seconds. The settings will now be permanently
stored in the DTS until they are re-programmed.

8.2 Level adaptation for people with impaired hearing (HA-level)

To increase the handset level both for the handset and the headset (for people with impaired
hearing), the LED 9 can be set to on. This will give an extra amplification of 7 dB.

NOTE: The handset is as standard equipped with an hearing aid coil.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 8(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

8.3 Extra bell / busy signal

There are two alternatives using this function. The function is selected by means of LED 8.

Extra bell: Active when the DTS receives a ring signal. LED 8 shall be set to OFF.
The function can control an external alerting device or equal.

Busy signal: Active when the DTS is in off-hook mode. The LED 8 shall be set to ON.
The function can be used to control a “Do not disturb” lamp at the door or
other.

The function can be reached between pin 2 and pin 5 in jack J4. A short-circuit is obtained when
the function is ACTIVE (An opto relay is used to separate the external device electrically from the
telephone). Maximum load on EXTERNAL DEVICE is 1 A resistive or 0.3 A capacitive or 0,3 A
inductive load at maximum 24 V AC or 48 V DC (An external over voltage protection is
recommended).

8.4 Connection of extra handset

An extra handset can be connected to jack J2 fig 8-1. This handset will be connected in parallel
with the original handset. This means that two persons can listen to the conversation. Only one
person at the time shall speak due to speech quality. LED 7 shall be set to OFF.

8.5 Connection of headset or conference unit

A headset or conference unit can be connected to jack J2 fig 8 -1. When connecting a headset or
conference unit LED 7 shall be programmed to ON to activate the locally supported
headset/conference mode.

Headset/conference mode enables a dedicated key (KEY 4) on the DTS to work as the on/off
switch for the headset/conference connection. When on (LED 4 ON), an incoming call can be
answered using either the line key or the dedicated headset/conference key (KEY 4). The
connection can be closed using the clear (“C”) key.

To switch off the headset/conference mode, press the dedicated headset/conference key in idle
mode. The dedicated LED 4 will then be OFF.

To switch to handset mode during a headset/conference conversation the dedicated

headset/conference key can be pressed.

Lifting the handset in headset or idle mode will activate the handset mode.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 9(9)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 210 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-06-18 A

8.6 Connection of tape recorder

A tape recorder can be connected for recording of calls. The recorder can be connected either to
jack J3 fig 8-1 or jack J4 fig 8-1. In jack J3 pins a and b and in jack J4 pins 1 and 6 are used for
tape recorder output. The levels are adapted for 150 ohms load impedance. When using a tape
recorder or equivalent LED 6 shall be set to OFF.

8.7 Connection of PC-sound board

A PC sound board or equivalent can be connected to jack J3 fig 8-1. When connecting a “sound
board” two different modes can be selected. For easy connection of the “sound board” the
enclosed cable, RPM 130 017/1 can be connected to jack J3 fig 8-1.
The outgoing signal from the option unit, marked --> on the cable, shall be connected to the
input, often called LINE IN, of the “sound board”. If applicable the incoming signal to the option
unit, marked <-- on the cable, shall be connected to the output, often called LINE OUT, of the
“sound board”. See fig 8-3.

Recording mode: This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall record an ongoing
conversation. This mode is the same as tape recorder mode i.e. LED 6
is set to OFF.

PC/AUDIO mode: This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall be used for con-
versation. This mode requires the LED 6 to be set to ON.
Figure: 8-3. Connection of PC-sound board with cable RPM 130 017/1

8.8 Post installation measures

Connect the extension line and check that a call can be established and check that
the installed extra equipment can be used in both directions (if applicable).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
EBC/EN/DMTL Jonas Pettersson 1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
EBC/EN/DMTL (Sture Winther) 1998-04-20 B

Telephone sets (DBC 211 01, DBC 212 01,

DBC 213 01, DBY 409 01 or DBY 409 02 and DBY 410 02)

1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4 Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

5 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

7 Installation of DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

8 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 or DBY 409 02 to DBC 213 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

9 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Created by: EBCINSV
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

1 General

1.1 Scope

The digital telephone sets (DTS) and peripherals described in these installation instructions are
to be used together with the Ericsson exchanges ASB 501, ASB 150 02 or equivalent.

The DTS is connected to a digital extension board, ELU 28, or equivalent.

1.2 Environmental requirements

The products covered in these installation instructions comply with the prerequisites stipulated
for placing in office and exchange room environments.

2 Aids

Wall mounting requires additional screws.

Wall mounting with option unit requires additional washers (spacers).

3 Preparations

Verify that it is possible to connect an extension line.

Check that a line cord is available.

4 Power equipment

The DTS and its peripherals are powered from the extension line.
Maximum power consumption: 3.5 W

5 Earthing

The DTS and its peripherals need no special earthing.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

6 Cabling

Maximum line length between DTS and extension line unit (ELU) using
EKKX 0,5 mm (180 ohms/km) cable: 1000 m (3280 ft):

7 Installation of DTS

7.1 Delivery method

The DTS is normally delivered in a box together with two foot consoles, one handset,
one handset cord, two designation labels and two designation covers.

7.2 Connection of the handset

The handset cord shall be connected in one end (short uncoiled) to the handset
and the other end (long uncoiled) to the connector in the bottom of the set marked HANDSET.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

7.3 Connection to the extension line

The line cord shall be connected in one end to the wall box according to fig 7-1 and the other end
to the connector in the bottom of the set marked LINE.
Connection of extension line

7.4 Wall mounting

• Mount the two/three screws on the wall according to fig 7-2.

• Snap off and turn the hook around according to fig 7-3.
• If the adjustable foot consoles are mounted they must be removed.
• Mount the telephone on the screws.
(All distances in mm)
Positions for screws DBC 211 01/ DBC 212 01 DBC 213 01

*) For DBY 409 No. 1

**) For DBY 409 No. 2
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

Mounting of hook
Position for hook:

Wall mounting

180

7.5 Post installation measures

Verify that a call can be established from and to the DTS.

8 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 or DBY 409 02 to DBC 213 01

To connect one or two key panels use DBY 409 01.

To connect more than two, up to four, key panels use only DBY 409 02 for all positions, it is not
possible to mix DBY 409 01 and DBY 409 02.

8.1 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 to telephone DBC 213 01

• Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges.
• Disconnect the DTS from the exchange
• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts
• Remove the foot console next to contact J8
• Break off the blinder covering the contact J8
• Connect the cable from DBY 409 01 to contact J8
• Attach DBY 409 01 to DBC 213 01 and secure it with the three screws (S1, S2 and S3)
• Snap the foot console on to the DBY 409 01
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 6(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

If a second DBY 409 01 is to be installed, do as follows

• The procedure above is repeated for the second DBY 409 01

• Move the foot to the second DBY 409 01

A third DBY 409 01 cannot be connected

Rear view of DBC 213 01 with two DBY 409 01 connected.

DTS type
DBC 213 01

8.2 Post installation measures

Connect the DBC 213 01 with the DBY 409 01 to the extension line and verify that the bottom
LED at each DBY 409 01 is activated during start-up. Establish a call using the keys located on
the DBY 409 01.

8.3 Installation of key panel DBY 409 02 to DTS DBC 213 01

• Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges.

• Disconnect the OPI from the exchange
• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts
• Break off the blinder covering the contact J8
• Connect the cable from DBY 409 02 to contact J8
• Attach DBY 409 02 to DBC 214 01 and secure it with the three screws (S1, S2 and S3)

If additional DBY 409 02 are to be installed (maximum four), do as follows

• The procedure above is repeated for the second DBY 409 02

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 7(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

Snap the enclosed foot console to the last DBY 409 02 installed
Remove the blinder covering the contact J9
Connect the power supply unit (RES 141 305/2 or equal) to the DBY 409 02 closest to
the DBC 213 01 and then to the mains.
Rear view of DBC 213 01 with two DBY 409 02 connected.
Power supply unit

MAINS

J9

DBY 409 02 J8
DBY 409 02

DTS type
DBC 213 01

8.4 Post installation measures

Connect the DBC 213 01 with the DBY 409 02 to the extension line and verify that the bottom
LED at each DBY 409 02 is activated during start-up. Establish a call using the keys located on
each of the DBY 409 02.

9 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02

Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges:

• Disconnect the telephone set from the exchange

• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts

• Break off the blinder covering the contact C4.

• Connect the cable P1 from DBY 410 02 to the contact C4 on the telephone.
• Insert DBY 410 02 to its place in the bottom of the telephone. Secure it with the screw SCR 1.
• Remove the blinder covering the connectors.
• Move the handset cord from the DTS to the jack J1 marked HANDSET.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 8(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

Note: When using DBY 410 02 the handset connector on the DTS will be disabled.

With the DBY 410 02 mounted, the telephone cannot be wall mounted without extra measures.
Spacers, with a thickness > 15 mm, have to be mounted between the telephone and the wall.
Rear view of DTS with DBY 410 02 connectors.

9.1 Programming of option unit functions

To program the option unit functions, OPTION UNIT FUNCTION MODE must be selected by
pressing buttons C, * and 1 simultaneously during 1 second. The present setting is then indicated
by the four bottom LEDs of the DTS.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 9(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

Option unit function mode settings

LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9

LED Number LED ON LED OFF

9 HA level (See below) Normal level

8 Busy signal Extra bell

7 Headset mode Extra handset

6 PC-Audio Tape recorder mode

To change the settings the corresponding buttons can be pressed and the change of status will
be indicated by the associated LED.

To exit the programming mode press # or wait 30 seconds. The settings will now be permanently
stored in the DTS until they are re-programmed.

9.2 Level adaptation for people with impaired hearing (HA-level)

To increase the handset level both for the handset and the headset (for people with impaired
hearing), the LED 9 can be set to on. This will give an extra amplification of 7 dB.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 10(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

9.3 Extra bell / busy signal

There are two alternatives using this function. The function is selected by means of LED 8.

Extra bell: Active when the DTS receives a ring signal. LED 8 shall be set to OFF.
The function can control an external alerting device or equal.

Busy signal: Active when the DTS is in off-hook mode. The LED 8 shall be set to ON.
The function can be used to control a “Do not disturb” lamp at the door or
other.

The function can be reached between pin 2 and pin 5 in jack J4. A short-circuit is obtained when
the function is ACTIVE (An opto relay is used to separate the external device electrically from the
telephone). Maximum load on EXTERNAL DEVICE is 1 A resistive or 0.3 A capacitive or 0,3 A
inductive load at maximum 24 V AC or 48 V DC (An external over voltage protection is
recommended).

9.4 Connection of extra handset

An extra handset can be connected to jack J2 fig 9-1. This handset will be connected in parallel
with the original handset. This means that two persons can listen to the conversation. Only one
person at the time shall speak due to speech quality. LED 7 shall be set to OFF.

9.5 Connection of headset or conference unit

A headset or conference unit can be connected to jack J2 fig 9-1. When connecting a headset or
conference unit LED 7 shall be set to ON to activate the locally supported headset/conference
mode.

This function enables a dedicated key on the DTS to work as the on/off switch for
headset/conference mode. When the LED on the DTS is activated an incoming call can be
answered using either the line key or the dedicated headset/conference key (KEY 4). The
connection can be closed using the clear (“C”) key.

To switch off the headset/conference mode, press the dedicated headset/conference key in idle
mode. The dedicated LED 4 will then be OFF.

To switch to handset mode during a headset/conference conversation the dedicated

headset/conference key can be pressed.

Lifting the handset in headset or idle mode will activate the handset mode.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 11(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531- DBC 211 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1998-04-20 B

9.6 Connection of tape recorder

A tape recorder can be connected for recording of calls. The recorder can be connected either to
jack J3 fig 9-1or jack J4 fig 9-1. In jack J3 pins a and b and in jack J4 pins 1 and 6 are used for
tape recorder output. The levels are adapted for 150 ohms load impedance. When using a tape
recorder or equivalent LED 6 shall be set to OFF.

9.7 Connection of PC-sound board

A PC sound board or equivalent can be connected to jack J3 fig 9-1. When connecting a “sound
board” two different modes can be selected. For easy connection of the "sound board" the
enclosed cable, RPM 130 017/1 can be connected to jack J3 fig 9-1.
The outgoing signal from the option unit, marked --> on the cable, shall be connected to the
input, often called LINE IN, of the "sound board". If applicable the incoming signal to the option
unit, marked <-- on the cable, shall be connected to the output, often called LINE OUT, of the
"sound board". See fig 9-3.

Recording mode: This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall record an ongoing
conversation. This mode is the same as tape recorder mode i.e. LED 6
is set to OFF.

PC/AUDIO mode:
This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall be used for con-
versation. This mode requires the LED 6 to be set to ON.
Connection of PC-sound board with cable RPM 130 017/1

9.8 Post installation measures

Connect the extension line and check that a call can be established and check that
the installed extra equipment can be used in both directions (if applicable).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
EBC/EN/DMTL Thomas Åsberg 1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
EBC/EN/DMTL (Sture Winther) 1997-11-19 A

Operator’s console (DBC 214 01, DBY 409 01 or

DBY 409 02 and DBY 410 02)

1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

4 Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

5 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

7 Installation of OPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

8 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 or DBY 409 02 to DBC 214 01 . . . . . 5

9 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Created by: EBCINSV
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

1 General

1.1 Scope

The digital operator’s instrument (OPI) and peripherals described in these installation
instructions are to be used together with the Ericsson exchanges ASB 150 02 or equivalent.

The OPI is connected to a digital extension board, ELU-D_ or equivalent.

1.2 Environmental requirements

The products covered in these installation instructions comply with the prerequisites stipulated
for placing in office and exchange room environments.

2 Aids

Wall mounting requires additional screws.

Wall mounting with option unit requires additional washers (spacers).

3 Preparations

Verify that it is possible to connect an extension line.

Check that a line cord is available.

4 Power equipment

The OPI and its peripherals are powered from the extension line.
If using DBY 409 02 the first (closest to the OPI) shall be supplied from the mains using a
power supply unit RES 141 305/2 or equal.

5 Earthing

The OPI and its peripherals need no special earthing.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

6 Cabling

Maximum line length between OPI and extension line unit (ELU) using
EKKX 0,5 mm (180 ohms/km) cable: 1000 m (3280 ft).

7 Installation of OPI

7.1 Delivery method

The OPI is normally delivered in a box together with two foot consoles, one handset,
one handset cord, two designation labels and two designation covers.

7.2 Connection of the handset

The handset cord shall be connected in one end (short uncoiled) to the handset
and the other end (long uncoiled) to the connector in the bottom of the set marked HANDSET.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

7.3 Connection to the extension line

The line cord shall be connected in one end to the wall box according to fig 7-1 and the other end
to the connector in the bottom of the set marked LINE.
Connection of extension line

7.4 Wall mounting

• Mount the two/three screws on the wall according to fig 7-2.

• Snap off and turn the hook around according to fig 7-3.
• If the adjustable foot consoles are mounted they must be removed.
• Mount the OPI on the screws.
Positions for screws (All distances in mm)

*) For DBY 409 No. 1

**) For DBY 409 No. 2,3 and 4 add 66mm
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

Mounting of hook
Position for hook:

Wall mounting

180

7.5 Post installation measures

Verify that a call can be established from and to the OPI.

8 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 or DBY 409 02 to DBC 214 01

To connect one or two key panels use DBY 409 01.

To connect more than two, up to four, key panels use only DBY 409 02 for all positions, it is not
possible to mix DBY 409 01 and DBY 409 02.

8.1 Installation of key panel DBY 409 01 to OPI DBC 214 01

• Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges.
• Disconnect the OPI from the exchange
• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts
• Remove the foot console next to contact J8
• Break off the blinder covering the contact J8
• Connect the cable from DBY 409 01 to contact J8
• Attach DBY 409 01 to DBC 214 01 and secure it with the three screws (S1, S2 and S3)
• Snap the foot console on to the DBY 409 01
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 6(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

If a second DBY 409 01 is to be installed, do as follows

• The procedure above is repeated for the second DBY 409 01

• Move the foot to the second DBY 409 01
Rear view of DBC 214 01 with two DBY 409 01 connected.

OPI type
DBC 214 01

8.2 Installation of key panel DBY 409 02 to OPI DBC 214 01

• Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges.

• Disconnect the OPI from the exchange
• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts
• Break off the blinder covering the contact J8
• Connect the cable from DBY 409 02 to contact J8
• Attach DBY 409 02 to DBC 214 01 and secure it with the three screws (S1, S2 and S3)

If additional DBY 409 02 are to be installed (maximum four), do as follows

• The procedure above is repeated for the second DBY 409 02

Snap the enclosed foot console to the last DBY 409 02 installed
Remove the blinder covering the contact J9
Connect the power supply unit (RES 141 305/2 or equal) to the DBY 409 02 closest to
the DBC 214 01 and then to the mains.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 7(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

Rear view of DBC 214 01 with two DBY 409 02 connected.

Power supply unit

MAINS

J9

J8

DBY 409 02
DBY 409 02

OPI type
DBC 214 01

8.3 Post installation measures

Connect the DBC 214 01 with the DBY 409 02 to the extension line and verify that the bottom
LED at each DBY 409 02 is activated during start-up. Establish a call using the keys located on
each of the DBY 409 02.

9 Installation of option unit DBY 410 02

Make necessary arrangements to avoid electrostatic discharges:

• Disconnect the OPI set from the exchange

• Avoid if possible to touch the contacts

• Break off the blinder covering the contact C4.

• Connect the cable P1 from DBY 410 02 to the contact C4 on the OPI.
• Insert DBY 410 02 to its place in the bottom of the OPI. Secure it with the screw SCR 1.
• Move the handset cord from the OPI to the jack J1 marked HANDSET.
• Mount the enclosed cover to protect the connectors from ESD.

Note: When using DBY 410 02 the handset connector on the OPI will automatically be disabled.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 8(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

With the DBY 410 02 mounted, the OPI shall be wall mounted using extra spacers, with a
thickness > 15 mm, have to be mounted between the OPI and the wall.
Rear view of OPI with DBY 410 02 connectors.

OPI Type DBC 214 01

9.1 Programming of option unit functions

To program the option unit functions, OPTION UNIT FUNCTION MODE must be selected by
pressing buttons C, * and 1 simultaneously during 1 second. The present setting is then indicated
by the four bottom LEDs of the OPI.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 9(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

Option unit function mode settings

LED 4

LED 5

LED 6 LED 8

LED 7 LED 9

LED Number LED ON LED OFF (Default setting)

6 PC-Audio Tape recorder mode

7 Headset mode Extra handset

8 Busy signal Extra bell

9 HA level (See below) Normal level

To change the settings the corresponding buttons can be pressed and the change of status will
be indicated by the associated LED.

To exit the programming mode press # or wait 30 seconds. The settings will now be permanently
stored in the OPI until they are re-programmed.

9.2 Level adaptation for people with impaired hearing (HA-level)

To increase the handset level both for the handset and the headset (for people with impaired
hearing), the LED 9 can be set to on. This will give an extra amplification of 7 dB.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 10(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

9.3 Extra bell / busy signal

There are two alternatives using this function. The function is selected by means of LED 8.

Extra bell: Active when the OPI receives a ring signal. LED 8 shall be set to OFF.
The function can control an external alerting device or equal.

Busy signal: Active when the OPI is in off-hook mode. The LED 8 shall be set to ON.
The function can be used to control a “Do not disturb” lamp at the door or
other.

The function can be reached between pin 2 and pin 5 in jack J4. A short-circuit is obtained when
the function is ACTIVE (An opto relay is used to separate the external device electrically from the
OPI). Maximum load on EXTERNAL DEVICE is 1 A resistive or 0.3 A capacitive or 0,3 A
inductive load at maximum 24 V AC or 48 V DC (An external over voltage protection is
recommended).

9.4 Connection of extra handset

An extra handset can be connected to jack J2 fig 9-1. This handset will be connected in parallel
with the original handset. This means that two persons can listen to the conversation. Only one
person at the time should speak due to speech quality. LED 7 shall be set to OFF.

9.5 Connection of headset or conference unit

A headset or conference unit can be connected to jack J2 fig 9-1. When connecting a headset or
conference unit LED 7 shall be set to ON to activate the locally supported headset/conference
mode.

This function enables a dedicated key on the OPI to work as the on/off switch for
headset/conference mode. When the LED on the OPI is activated an incoming call can be
answered using either the line key or the dedicated headset/conference key (K 4). The
connection can be closed using the clear (“C”) key.

To switch off the headset/conference mode, press the dedicated headset/conference key in idle
mode. The dedicated LED 4 will then be OFF.

To switch to handset mode during a headset/conference conversation the dedicated

headset/conference key can be pressed.

Lifting the handset in headset or idle mode will activate the handset mode.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 11(11)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
1531-DBC 214 01 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1997-11-19 A

9.6 Connection of tape recorder

A tape recorder can be connected for recording of calls. The recorder can be connected either to
jack J3 fig 9-1or jack J4 fig 9-1. In jack J3 pins a and b and in jack J4 pins 1 and 6 are used for
tape recorder output. The levels are adapted for 600 ohms load impedance. When using a tape
recorder or equivalent LED 6 shall be set to OFF.

9.7 Connection of PC-sound board

A PC sound board or equivalent can be connected to jack J3 fig 9-1. When connecting a “sound
board” two different modes can be selected. For easy connection of the "sound board" the
enclosed cable, RPM 130 017/1 can be connected to jack J3 fig 9-1.
The outgoing signal from the option unit, marked --> on the cable, shall be connected to the
input, often called LINE IN, of the "sound board". If applicable the incoming signal to the option
unit, marked <-- on the cable, shall be connected to the output, often called LINE OUT, of the
"sound board". See fig 9-3.

Recording mode: This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall record an ongoing
conversation. This mode is the same as tape recorder mode i.e. LED 6
is set to OFF.

PC/AUDIO mode:
This mode can be used when the “sound board” shall be used for con-
versation. This mode requires the LED 6 to be set to ON.
Connection of PC-sound board with cable RPM 130 017/1

9.8 Post installation measures

Connect the extension line and check that a call can be established and check that
the installed extra equipment can be used in both directions (if applicable).
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1(5)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
EBC/FMD/TL Thomas Åsberg 47/1531-APD 101 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
EBC/FMD/TL (Thomas Åsberg) 1996-04-10 D

TAU D
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4 Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Delivery method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
5 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.1 Program units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
7 Power equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
9 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
10 Post installation measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Created by: EBCINSV
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 2(5)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
47/1531-APD 101 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1996-04-10 D

1 General

1.1 Scope

TAU D, TERMINAL ADAPTER UNIT with product number: ZAT 505 120/X is a terminal adapter
for connection of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) that wants to access to the proprietary signal
channel in the Ericsson exchanges ASB 501, ASB 150 or equivalent. It can operate in stand
alone mode or share the extension line with a digital system telephone. It can share the
telephone line with digital system telephones (DTS) of the DBC 600, DBC 200 families or
equivalent. The telephone is connected to the TAU D.The TAU D is mainly intended for use with
the OWS, Application link, Personal Screen Call and PC-OPI for ASB 150. A Service provider
software is also included in the package and installed according to installation guide
XX/LZT 102 2301

TAU D is connected to a digital extension board ELU 28 or equivalent in the exchange via an
extension line.
Example of TAU D connection with DTS

DTS

DTE

exchange
TAU D

1.2 Space requirements

Dimensions: width 152 mm

height 33 mm
depth 75 mm

TAU can be placed in lying position or wall mounted by using an adhesive Velcro(R)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 3(5)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
47/1531-APD 101 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1996-04-10 D

1.3 Technical data

Power consumption: maximum 1.0 W

1.4 Environmental requirements

TAU D complies with the prerequisites stipulated for placing in office and exchange room
environments.

2 Aids

Wall mounting requires an adhesive Velcro(R).

3 Preparations

Verify that is possible to connect an extension line.

Switch of the DTE to be connected to the TAU D.

4 Delivery method

TAU D is delivered with a 2200 mm (7,2 ft) connection cable with modular RJ12 connectors in
both ends. It shall be used to connect a telephone to the TAU D. A 9 to 9 pole (female/male) cable
(V.24/RS-232-C) is also delivered with TAU D. It shall be used to connect a computer(PC) to the
TAU D. Enclosed is also a Service Provider software.

The connection cable to the exchange is not included.

5 Unpacking

---

6 Mounting

6.1 Program units

No special program unit in the exchange is required.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4(5)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
47/1531-APD 101 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1996-04-10 D

7 Power equipment

The TAU D is powered from the Extension line.

8 Earthing

The TAU D needs no special earthing.

9 Cabling

Maximum line length using DBC 200 series telephones and 0,5 mm EKKX cable:
1000m (3280 ft)
exemption: using a DBC 203 with 2 DBY 409 and 0,5 mm EKKX cable: 800m (2625 ft)

Maximum line length using DBC 600 series telephones and 0,5 mm EKKX cable:
1000m (3280 ft)

Recommended maximum cable length between:

TAU D and PC: 3,0m (9,8 ft)

The following cables are used:

- Telephone jack cable with modular RJ12 connector towards the TAU D

- Telephone cable with modular RJ12 connector in both ends to be used when a digital system
telephone shall be connected to the TAU D

- Standard 9 pole V.24/RS-232-C cable with a male connector towards the TAU D.

NOTE: Using TAU D together with DBC 600 series telephones connected to ELU 28 or
ELU 25/3 will in some configurations slightly exceed the maximum line current.
This will cause the TAU D and DBC 600 telephone not to start or work properly.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5(5)
Uppgjord (även faktaansvarig om annan) - Prepared (also subject responsible if other) Nr - No.
47/1531-APD 101 02 Uen
Dokansv/Godkänd - Doc respons/Approved Kontr - Checked Datum - Date Rev File
1996-04-10 D

Overview of TAU D connection

Enclosed cable with RJ12 connectors

DBC 203

DTE
Exchange

Wall
socket

TAU D

Cable Not enclosed Enclosed V.24/RS-232-C cable

10 Post installation measures

Connect a DTS and check that a call can be established.

Check that the LED is slowly blinking.
For the Service provider consult the installation guide XX/LZT 102 2301